IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) k A {/ % & i/l fA 11.25 |50 '""■■ 2.5 2.2 2.0 1.8 U. IIIIII.6 V <^ /. riiuiugicipIiiL Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ^ r ,y .V &$> C/j CIHM ICMH Microfiche Collection de Series microfiches (Monographs) (monographies) Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiq ues AftO Technical and Bibliosraphic Notes / Notes tec^ The Institute has attempted to obtain the best originLl copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of ii. ning, are checked below. D D n Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagee Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restauree et/ou pelliculee Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes geographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.c autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en coi. eur D D Bound with other material/ Relie avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along .nterior margin/ La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distorsion le long de la marge interieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines page' blanches ajoutees lurs d'(/ne restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela etait possible, ces pages n'ont pas ete filmees. n/ Additional comments:/ Commentaire: supplementaires: Parts of pages 31-32 are mlssii This Item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filme au taux de reduction mdique ci-dessous. _IOX 14X IflX I I I I I I I I I I rx 12X 16X 20X I Bibliographic Notes / Notes techniques et bibliographiques L'Inst'tut a microf ilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui d et6 possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-£tre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la methode normale de f ilmage sont indiques ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur /] Pages damaged/ Pages endommagees D Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restau'ees et/ou pellicultes Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages decolorees, tachetees ou piquees D Pages detached/ Pages detachees D n □ Includes ir Comprend Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of print varies/ Qualite inegate de I'impression Continuous pagination/ Pagination continue index(es)/ Comprend un (des) index Title on header taken from:/ Le litre de I'en-tfite provient; itie page of issue/ Page de titre de la livraison □ Caption of Titre de de issue/ depart de la livraison □ Masthead/ Ge nerique (periodiques) de Id livraison ts of pages 31-32 are missing. 22 X 26 X 30 X 20X 24X 28X 22 1 The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: National Library of Canada The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrattd impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last mcorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the synrbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 ■ced thanks ada L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grdwS d la gdndrositi de: Bibliothdque nationale du Canada t quality legibility h the ate filmed ling on Bd impres- )te. All ing on the mpres- a printed fiche "CON- 'EIMD"), 4d at ge to be Imed , left to 3S as ate the Les images suivantes ont 6X6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettet§ de l'exemplaire film6, et en conformity avec les conditions du coi.^rat de filmage. Les exempleirus originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprim^e sont film^s en commen^ant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreiote d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont film^s en commengant par la premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: lo symbole — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE". le symboie V signifie "FIIM". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre filmds d des taux de reduction diff^rents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul cliche, il est film^ d partir de Tangle supdrieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mdthode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 'V'^NVXx'S^K., ,^,.^.,.,,. , ,;,^JU>.--.. ■•>«*«;*?■ !SSi!t(^«i>K-." ■■(*« ;/•! I /' filler i- Cfl's ^i)urationiil S wies. G^RAMMAR OF THK LATIN LANGUAGE, iot Si&b/c ant. Ijigl^cr Class Sdjools. BY LEONHARD SCHMITZ, LL.D. OI-AB.ICAI. .XAMHf^E « TH« U2.IVKR8ITY or IiONBON, ETC. CANADIAN COPY-RIGHT EDITION. TORONTO: ADAM MILLER & C 18^8. Entered according ,o Ac. of Parliamcn. of Canada, by Adam Miiler «. Co., m the Office ol the Minister of Agricniture, in the year 1878. INTRODUCTION. ITie Latin language is one of the great family of Aryan or Indo-European languages. Nearest akin to it is the Greek, the resemblance to which, both in its roots and Its mflectzons, is so great and so striking, that we cannot avoid the conclusion that at one tin.e the two languages were entirely one and the same, which modem scholars, for want of a better name, have called the Graeco-Italian language. That must have been the time when Greeks and Lat.ns or Italians) were still united as one nation, and before they separated. Afterwards one branch proceeded into the eastern peninsula of southern Europe, called Greece wh.le the other branch migrate! into the peninsula of Italy' When once settled in these tw ,eninsulas, separated by tl e Ad atic Sea, each branch and its language entered upon a separate career of development, and what originally had perhaps been only different dialects, now became two "differ- ent languages-the Greek and the Latin-which, though differing m many respects, yet retain unmistakable signs of theu' original identity. "" If we compare Latin and Greek with the Sanscrit, their elder sister, we find that the Latins in some respects pre- served the old forms of their once common langLge with greater care than the versatile Greeks; for, indecIcnJon. the banscnt has nine cases, of which the Latin has pre.orved six INTRODUCTION. wliile the Greek has only five. On the other hand, the Greek has retained the dual, of which there is scarcely a trace in Latin, and a much greater variety of forms in the conjugation of its verbs, though regard for euphony lias fre- quently so far modified the forms that they resemble the Sanscrit less than the Latin does. A careful comparison with the Greek and other kindred languages has, in our days, greatly modified the study and treatment of Latin Grammar, esj)eciully that part of it com- monly called the accidence ; and henceforth no grammar can be satisfactory which does not incorporate the i)rinciples and positive results of such a comparison. Many phenomena in Latin, as well as in other languages, which until recent times seemed inexi)licable and arbitrary, are now explained and appear in their proper light, while many erroneous notions have been dispelled. But what has been of no less impor- tance is a comparison of the Latin of the best or classical period of its literature with the earlier forms of the language, for much that seems mysterious in the later language turns out to be the natural growth and outcome of more ancient and fuller forms ; in short, to be rightly understood, a language must be compared not only with others, but with itself at different periods of its development. Every language is subject to a process of decay, or rather simplification, in its forms and inflections, and the further we go back in its history, the more we discover its original and fuller forms out of which the later ones have grown by a natural process of decay or development. The grammar of a language, therefore, is not the same in all the periods of its history, and a complete grammar ought to exhibit the rules as they were observed at the various stages of its progress and development; but a Latin Grammar which, like the present, claims to be no more than a School INTRODUCTION. . Grammar, must, on the whole, Ii,„it itself to „ . * and exposition of the laws which wcl !^^ .. /.^TT"! wntors com.nonly read in «,.l,n i " ^ ^'^^ ^''^*^ wholly ..xclu.led, H„t ,, ' „ "« ? , r. ' ' "'"""' ''"' itaflfof«ll fl,/-, , , '"' «'"'""'nr must avaU In regard to the Svntav of +T,o t x- , in this «n,l„l, .1, . " '^"' ^ '"'™ succeeded II tt,s and whether the general character of the Grammar « n harmony with the progress of modern scholaLhTp I fTas ri'" Tr *" '""'^' '-""S" ' --y add hat 'a, thou'hrirKf *"'='' ^ '"'''' "'^S'"^'''' -'""« tha I thought m,ght be of any assistance to make the book useful cnaracter without wbch no real progress is possible. L. SOHMITZ. WNDON, SoiKmUr, 1875. CONTENTS. Chapter I.- ir.- III.- IV.- V.- VI.- VII.- VIII.- PART I. -THE A^-IDENCE. IX. X. XI. XII. XIII.. XIV.. XV.. XVI._ XVII. XVIII. XIX.- XX.- XXI.- XXII. _ XXIII.- XXIV.—. XXV.— •The Alphabet and Pronunciation. -IHE Parts of Speech, -Substantives and their Genders -JHE Declensions, . -The Fir.st or A Declension, .' ~r^' ^ECOND or Declension, -iHE Third or Consonant DeclensIon " -ivE.MARKS ON SOME CaSES OF THE Third^DeCLPN. -The Fourth or U Declension! -IHE Fifth or E Declension, -Peculiarities and Irregularities in the Dr cLENsroN of Substantivfs ^ -Adjectives and their Declension" Comparison of Adjectives. -The Numerals, . » • • . •The Pronouns, . " ' ' ' -The Vehb in General, . '. ' ' -J HE Vei:b esse, to Be, -The First or A Conjugation,' IHE bKCOND OR E CONJUGATION, . iHE iHIRD OR CON.SONANT CONJUGATION.' liiE Fourth or I Conjugation, Deponent Verbs, Contracted and Archaic Verbal 'Forms Formation of the Present, Perfect and Supine from the Stem, ' S^Snt^t::sS:""^^^ Conjugations in Lisns of Verbs forming their PEUFEers and SnJl'cI'S,'' ™' CUNJUGATIONS.-FIRS. •Verbs of the Second CoNjuciTioN* Verbs of the Third Conjugation, Paqb 9 10 12 13 IS 17 20 29 32 34 35 37 41 44 48 55 5!i 63 69 76 81 86 89 90 92 93 93 97 \i 8 CONTENTS. Chaptrr X\vVr~nf "'' ""^ ';"^ ^"^^™ Conjugation, YVTv t"'*^^"^'*''* ^^^ Defective Vems ■^^^X.. — AlJVKItBS, , XXXr. — Pkki'ositions, AAAHl, — INTEKJECTIONS, . XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII. xxxvin. XXXIX. XL.- xu.. XLIL- XLIII.- XLIV.- XLV.- XLVL- XLVII.- XLVIII.- XLIX.- L.- LI.- LII.- LIIL- PART II. -SYNTAX. — SURJECT AND PREDICATE— ArnUBUTE-ApPOSI ^ TiON— Relative PKOi\ou>!.s, —The Nominative, —The AcciT.><.vTivE, —The Dative, — Thk (Jknitive, . — Tiu; Ablative, . —The ^'ocATIVE, . — Adjectives, -Pronouns -The Voices and Moods in General, -The Indicative Mood and its Tenses -The Subjunctive and its Tenses, . ' -'i'lrii Imperative, -The Infinitive, . . , ' -The (Jerund and Gerundive,' -The Supine, ••...* -The Participles, ...'.* -Remarks on some of the Pronouns, -Some Remarks on the Negatives, -Some Remarks on the Structure of Latin Sentence,s, . APPENDICES. I.— Roman Names, . il. — Roman Money, . III. — Roman Weights, IV. — Roman Measures, . V. — The Roman Calbndab, . Paob 104 104 10(5 122 124 126 128 129 130 U5 136 143 148 156 164 164 1(58 172 173 178 196 198 203 206 207 209 213 215 217 ^19 220 220 221 5 %. LATIN GEAMMAE. PART I.-THB ACOIDBNCH, CHAPTER I. ■mii ALPHABET AND PRO.VU.vciATroif. Five of theraf „ ; r; ;i, • "• "■ ''- ?> >•• »> '. " w ^. ", w],en followed by a v-o 'p '„ " '"" ""'I "l'^' ■' ound. Tlio li»ll " or ,„, as if ",>„*!■' i;™""""^! like the Eng cousenant, it was p,o ou tl i, tte "" Z""''™' ''■' » but e., oi, and .^i occur very iVX tI' ' '''' ^'' '"'^^ ^*'/ ciation is somewhat uncertifn' f iZ" i .^'"■ ^^"'^''^ P'-ouun- double sound) seems Ts g^i'i ^^^it.f « «7« ^^pl^thong m prommciation. "'' * ^°*^ ^^^^^Is were lieard ,^ 3. The consonants were mviKoM,, wHtten, and in tUe .™e "^^U^ZT^Z:^: 10 LATIN GRAMMAR. Thus c was always pronounced as /-, and tlie g as the English g m good, gift, gang. The t also was always pronounciHl as the English t in tin, tan, tomb. The letter x is a double consonant, benig a combination of c or g with s. The conson- ant k is used only in a few words, where it is followeil by a, as halmdae., Kaeso, Karthago. 'Jlie letter q is never used without a u after it, together with which we i)ronounce it ikc kw, as qui, quae, quod, though the Romans ai.pear to have pronounced the two letters like a simple k, as is still the case in French. In England, the common custom is to pronounce Latin as it it were English. §4. In i)ronouncing Latin words attention must be paid to the quantity of syllables, i.e., a distinction must be made between those which are long and those which are short Long are those >vhich C(mtain a long vowel or a dii)hthoi.<^ and those in which a vowel, though naturally short, Ts lollowed by two or more consonants, in which case the vow<>i IS said to be long by position. A vowel followed by anotlic-r vowel is generally short. Single vowels may be lona or short : when long they may be marked thus a, e, I, d u • when short thus cl, e, i, o, H. ■ > ' ' ^ 5. Words of two syllables always have the emphasis or accent on the first. In words of more than two syllables the accent foils on the last but one, if it be long, as' liomdmis ; but If the last syllable but one be short, and the one pre- ceding It long, this latter has the accent, as Mmilho amdverat. When both the second and third last syllable are short, the accent is nevertheless put upon the third last as in vtuher. No Latin word has the accent on the last syllable. CHAPTEE IL THE PARTS OF SPEECH. § 6. All the words of the Latin language are divided into nine classes, commonly called the parts of speech. They THE PARTS OF SPEECH. jj 1. Substantives, that is, names of persons or fV ^ J-oms, brave; «j;;:-^;,;:tut^'"'' ^^^'^^ "^"^^' bkd; <5. Pronouns— (I],.v aic so c.ii.i;] i «tand for tl,o ...nes ^ ,: 'o is ^r^^r^ '''^' ^^ t^em 4. Numerals. exin-P^-^',,,, +1 ', ' ^*' '^^^ two; ,„, ,l„.oo; ,,„, ™''^^- -^ '""«, one; «.V, afc/r. ' '"' ^ '"^^''•' "^-^r; ante, before,' 9. Interjections are mostly mere exfl^mnf iscalJSS„;:,,X"'' of iaaeotion, ana their i.fle„u„„ 12 LATIN GRAMMAR. The remaining parts of speech and many numerals are not cajiable of any inflection, but remain the same in all cir- cunistanciis. § 9. In declension and conjugation the inflected or change- able ])art of a word must be carefully distinguished from the piu-t wliich reniiiins unchanged. This latter is called the Stem, and consists of that part of a word which remains un- alttn-tid in all circumstances, e.g., pleb-s, pleb-is, pleb-e, where s, is,^ and e are the terminations, and pleb the stem ; audi-o, avdi-yi, andi-tinn, audi-re, where the stem is audi, and the terminations are o, vi, turn, and re. CHAPTER III. SUBSTANTIVES AND TIIEIP. GENDERS. § 10. Substantives are names given to persowa or things, because they have certain (lualities or properties in common,' and such names are called common nouns ; but if they are names belonging to only one i)ersou or thing, they are called }n-oper names. Thus, equns, a horse, canis, a 'dog, homo, a nian, are common nouns ; but Ca'.sar, Vesuvius, Roma, Tiberis, are proper names. But if more than one jjerson or I)lace bears the same name, it is a mere accident, and not be- cause they have any qualities in common. § 11. Common nouns again may be divided into concrete and abstract nouns, the fonaer denoting things which we perceive by means of our senses, and the latter those things which we conceive only by the mind as distinct existences. Thus, domus, a house, arbor, a tree, are names of concrete things ; but virtits, muTiliiviiiii, justitia, justice, venustas, beauty, Sre abstract terms. § 12. All substantives are either of the masculine, feminine, or neuter gender. The gender of anv given substantive may be ascertained partly from its meaning, and p:irtlv from its termination, 'J'he following general rules may be laid down, SUBSTANTIVES AND THEIR GEyDKR,,. ,3 HtitronL'^ '^^^^^"^' «^°- f""^- the chapters on the ^«M«, J/«/ron« an 1 Sv!^ ^'," '''''^■' ^'^^^^'^«' ^H'^^^, 2. reminine arc the' names of f ' i ' t'"- ^^'"'^""'«- the names of toC t 's f •^''"^•'' ^"'^ ^««t of cious stones ' '"' «o^"' tries, islands, and pre- ^r example ao^^;^^:^::;^:^--^--^ the! gi,„*}.!^: rsrh'^^'^ beco„.e'"^i^e«tr"!:rs;*''-?-.'^'-'«es; chu,,^3o!>;uxi.Sonr'^-*^ fro. i^.iA^::j:^^^^^ CHAPTER IV. THE DECLENSIONS. f^ ^:!:r ~^:j:f -;::f «^-,es in the termina- to other word; in a^se/ enee S 7' {".-^'^"'^^ they stand expressed in English b^P rerosidof. '"''""' -^'' ^^^^''-^^ house of the father, or the^f^lS f ' ""' ^'"'''"'' ^"''"''' *^^« P;--cl h, ^rlll^aSo^tt utr ^'^t -^^ ^^ - there are six eases, viz. -.L ' * '' commonly expressed, 1. The Nominativo a^^-.^- , ,, tie horse rm,s, •* " '■enteuce : as ej,m« currit, u LATIN OIUMMAR. m *.. The Genitive (jhovo correctly Gcnetivo), denoting the class or genius to which a thing l.ok)nga, and soA'eral otlior rohitions wliich ai-o expressed in English by pre- positions : as anna miUt-is, the arms of a soldier ; ^^aiiior jidtridc, th(^ love of one's country. 3. The Dative, denoting the person to whom, or for whose advantage or disadvantage anything is or is done. In Kngjish this relation is generally expressed by the preposition to or for: as ostewlil fdio, lie shows to the .son; liber jmero ut'dis est, tlie book is nsefiil to a boy ; patri consul! t, he gives advice to the father. 4. The Accusative, denoting the object towards which an action is directed: as miujtstcr docet puerum, the master teaches the boy. 5. The Vocative is used in addnnising a person or a thin» : ^as ilii lmmort(di's, ye immortal gods ! G. The Ablative expresses various relations, as those of separation, cause, manner, instrument, time, place, &c., which are expressed ia English by the preposition's from, by, with, in, at, itc. NOTK. -The Sanscrit the oMest of the Aryan hiiiguagea, has two cases more, t\\o Lomhrc iiiul the Imlrumental ; the forms of these ca.ses boing lost in Li.tin, with very fovv ixceptions. tlieir functions have been assigned to the dative and abhitiye, wliich, for this reason, express a greater variety ot relations than the otiier cajes. *> ^ ""^'■J' § 15. Lixtin, like English substantives, have two numbers, the Singular ami the Plural ; and in each number they have the SIX cases mentioned abo^•e, so that every noun might have twehe dili'ereut endings, six for the singular and six lor the plural. § 16. All substantives are declined in one of five ways, whence it is said that there are Five Declensions. Words of wluch the genitive singular ends in ae are said to belong to the first declension, those of which the genitive ends in I to the second, those of which the genitive ends in is to the third, those of which the genitive ends in us to the fourth, and tho.^e of which the genitive ends in ei to the fifth. Note.— This rule, though repeated in nearly all grammars, is utterly unscientihc. The declension of a noun depends entirely upon the <,„hI letter of its stem, ar.d the number of declensions mieht be reduced to two-viz., the vowel declension, comprising what are com- THE DRCLFNfllONg. 15 cornprisiiiL' all nouns .,f ul,,;.! f) V ''"' ,''^ consonant declension, «o.n/.conB,^n,vnts 1 f " '^t.;" T^ ""'' '"," — "'^"t. -r thJ tl.e removal of tlu, ter;nin a ,.f / /,;:;';y'^ ^^i^y-M;!''-^ I'jvory Latin .Hctir.nary onul.t to ontL f n If f "^'v^ plural. nl'>"K Hitli its nominative « fh" *'"" "^'","' "'^ ''' ""''■'^tantive, «)h.w tlio real stem ' * " «""^"''' **'"«"''"• ^'•'^•■'* ""t ahvuy,; in t h^!;,'™:;::; '";!'?"" *!;r* ^^f t"^ -^^ "-- -- ''-lind contraction an, ot'luue ,;?,:, '''"''''^r" '"*^'° '^••'«'--" ^'•^"» tl.u onec,riKinal.l.cie«sionm '•'"'•'g'^H. A ^oo.! type of what is -nnnonl,' cailelrthrtln'l'rV'nBiSn:"'' " ^''" ^"'"^'^^^^'^ ''^ ^'''^^ •'^. 1''^' Accii,sativ«,Sin-ularn,lu,,vson.lsinm as is still tl... case lu the English /.-.,, and .■/..., from t L d i/^ 4. I Accsa iv,> rh„.al always emls in ., ,,r c.t ! 1 y . C. Tl.n Al.Iative SinpUar in all declensions originally rnd..d ni ./or .-sl>andman, and others, which Siufitilnr. Example. ^om. f Mensa (stem viensa), ,, .' :^;^"'^^-^ atal.le. Mensae, (r(>n 1lTnnnn/> /• ... Plural. (^>n. T)iit. Ace. Abl. Mensae, ofa tul.lc. Mensa-rum Mensae, to a tahle. Mensis, ' Mensa-m, a table. Mensa-s, Mensa, from, with, or Mensis by a tal)le. ' tables. Words for Exercise. of tiibles. to tables. tables. from, with, or by tables. »n 'iv;sLra Z^'z y:;;;"'i "'-'""• ^ /"""• »""'"' ^ ''»™. a tablet. ' '""'"' * K'^te ; naufa, a sailor; <«/;«^r(, litMlative singular, an(l in the non, n vo o , i .''• *''""'"'''*'^^ = the «nn (conipare he (.'reek « .and «< in T, „ uul^'^^' 'TlV' ^•'''•"■•'^' represents ai ;jblatu-o plural is a contraction o ' ,"., on Irl' V, V' '"' 7 ^''^^ ''"^'^'^ ^"^ J ho genitive sin-ular was orirnn.iij/ ^■'^^*^"' ^^'■^^-''^ «'« "' a,.pr4»). ra.-e thoGreek ,f.), of ^.hlch Ihe : " ^r;.";,:;? (-"tracted into a.,/eom: tivo in as IS still used, as mtrr f,T: -V •. ^" '""'« ^"""ds the geni- fannlias. theniotherof .rfa v. • "' '**' f'ltl'er of a family nJlr of. the genitive as a^!^ .'n "1^< .j^t;" ^f ^'^ ^^^^^^ ^^th siYch forms ./'/<«-6^«. SoalsorfM, agoddess ■/""". '^"^'^^ '"^"^ ablative plural andc/««. (two) and «« ftaefbotM Wh chCnV '''7 ' Z'*""''^' ^ freedwoumn ! ^OTE 3. -Some substant ves e^Iei'm™ '^''"'"f ^"'^ «'«*«6«*- met he «,.„,, of the genitive plS^lnto^^nr^'^.^ "^--^^"^ °^ '^«'«. «=<>''■ for ternyenarum and cae/ico/a,-L'«. ' ^"''•'•'^"'"'wand caelicolum Greek ^^rds of the First Declension. follow the first declension, thS7ii'^P'' "^™^ ^^^^ patronymics, they retain their Greek termination: in Pf?^^:^^^^'^' X. G. D. A. V. Ab. THE FIRST OR a DKCLENSION. tables. of tal)Ios. to tables. table.s. th, or by tab lea. od ; hnra, * ; tabula, rises from : thcrtcin resents ai ntive and II li.KfiHl'i), as; com- tlie geni- y ; mater icli forms singular ng. The tlie s be- s end in R, which e pl'iral woman ; s. ^fa, con- elicolum mascn* lyinics, joetry, n. 17 S hup I Jar. Examples. & Vo, , EpItScg. .,. al,ridgn.cnt. Epito^ao. ftii;;;Se:';;!;;;;;|;;;ri^--t. Epito.a-ru.. Al>l. Epitome f. '''' ';'K'"<'"t. " ■ piLome, from, \vith, .,r l,y an filjridgmuiit. •^iii//i(/ar, Aeneas. Aeneae. Acneae. Arneam or Acnoan Aenea. Aenua. 1 ..*»>, •Epuonias, i^pitoniis, Nom '^ieu. Dat. Aw.. Vo(;. Al)]. Words for Axercise. Anchlses. Anchisae. Anchisae. Anchison „r Anchisam. Anch.ae .„• Anchisa. Anchise or Anchisa Plural. a'>ri(lgment«. "f -■vl)ridgment3. to al>ri(lgnicnt8. a^ridgmfuta. I'-o'ii, with, or |,y abridgments. Shi I Hilar. (-ratnbe, cabbatre • C CHAPTER VT. THE SECOND OR DKCLEXSIOIf. thJ ?^^!:r -nZ-L-'-^H.^ Of .Ueh pnitive singular emls in" f *l*^;^^^"^( ''ecJension. Tlieir (anciently o.), .., or «„, (Greek 0.^" 'In '"*'''" '"^'^ ^" ^'^ Examples. 'Singular. ^"i' »• ' yea, l°°i' 01 a year. f ""0' to a year. f "°^m. a year. Anne, n ,; Ab.Ann6;f,.„„,,,,°Jny a year. X. G. D. A. V. Aval, Anno-rum, Annis, Anno-s, Anni, Aiinis, ■Plural. years, of years. to years. years. O ypaj.g I from, witJi, or by yeai's. 18 LATI.V r.RAMMAR. I 'ff^ III I ^- ^"«".. of a boy. ^- Puero, to a boy. f: Puerum, a bol. Ab. Puero, from, with, or by a boy. N. cfe V. Ag6r, a HoKI. ;•• Ag-n, ofafioM. A ^S''°' toafid,!. A. A-iu-m. aliold. Ab. Ag-ro, fi-oni, witl., or by ) a fiuki. NmA.,)^ , & V. yTemplu-m, a temple. G. TempII, of a temple. T). Tempo, to a tmnple. Ab. Teraplo, from, Mi.],; or Ijy a temple. Plnrnl. Puerl, Puerorum, Pueris, Puero 8, Pueris, from, Ag-ri, Affrorum, As-.is, A,n-in-law ; ftiljectjvea domcm, a decemvir, • {a, urn), e second according i^bs, and , fag us, a It ; ame- carbasus, )metimea 19 ret,uncd by writers of tho best uTofr 1 M^ /" ""'^ "">• "'"' t'''" o in *"',;;,"' «"/.'•"«, 3arom ; corio^°u,lrt '"^•'•''^"ro, especially after a v I le original ending of the ton it '" '/''""^ "'"' "/""«• ■ino dative ondinir (J in -i r„„* *• V /"'" ""^ '^oyLxrio). , The ablative i^ . o.S X ""^ "' '^"'""^'-^ "''^ ^''^'^'k .). dro.,,,ingwl.ichtheVm.a.frJi,^,,"":''-"'' '" 'h" jl-clension-t in i/ after « ot the first, ami .- fu this d^K in ''""'''"^^y lt""«thened! whence the ilie nominative and vooitivn.i. .. .hich i. .,i„ f™„j in J,;,' ;:fc °:t?"' «"''«" '» « w™<.i. ...), •■. In ]|k» manner t|,„ c,„l 5,"i. .!' ' '?"""i""l™lyclinn"c,l i„i "sr; "n 'r ■■"« "'■« "'.-v;;4:,^,f '- -"' "'"■"■™ .Ki K Nominative. ({nun, um, uuum (one), ^?'/'«> f '«• *"''"" (Hlonc), ^fus, nulla, ««//.,/(n'o:,e) AUus aha, aliud ^another)?' rzi. ',-f ''■"' "^'"■'"« (""e of two) ^icr, M P«o+= iSDinii/rt'T' ' as Nom. Deus, Gen. Dei, Siufjular. Dat, Ace. V'oe. Abl. Deo, Deu-m, Deus, Deo, God. of God. to (Jod. God. God ! fj-om, M'ith, or by God. T,-. , Plural. Du or di, Deo-rum or deflm, Diis or dis, Dfio-s, Dii or di. Diis or dIs, gods, of gods. to gods. gods. gods. The plural forms Dei and Dels are rarely used. from, with, or by goda. ! » ill tlie aocusative „%„.-, "I"' i""!' ™d generally '""■'. ^»-c. y»™, ail/sSVr, *■;' )U^,v^is ft-e.* WW* of tU Second Declension. genitive P, Paro. class make tl,e accnsative singular J'T r .^'™^ "^"^^s of this deele„.u,n : as no.ninatise .4Mj accu, Hv '^ t, "'^ ""'•^' ^reek accusative Andro,jeomi. ' ^'-'-"^'^tive ^;/,(7«a; Androgeos, ■ Ir'^tVn'L.i!;"?r«"'™x:epf tJIft'^nT ^^^'^ "^-^^ '^'^^^ ^e declined like the ., as Pron.,heu^"ZJtt '," * '^ J^^^t've they merely throw off Greek declen.sion, as nomtatii O ?'" '" '^^ ^^^^ follow the t^,i?d ^'7>/^.;. accusative' Orpli^^.^'^'^JX^^-^tiye Orp.eos, datiVe ^uS^'^: sar^is;- s^sS •? -^ -^^s of book. • CHAPTER VII. THE THIRD OR CONSONANT DECLENSION. ^^^^T^:^:!^^ ^^1^-- ^- a ste. ending ine nouns ad.l an to ]h ';., f '!"^/-«^"line and femin^ and tlu« ., wl,eu pre., 'i' b ^thcr " *'" --"i"ative, { itu b^ uther consonants, produces G. D. A. Ab. Qore freely : as >nows : — I. gods. of gods. to gods. gods. gods. 1, with, or by gods. d. ■tive singular nd generally iie ^gaean), im, ablative Utic declen- fetaiii the 6 iHgiilar in l; imes of this ;hird Greek Androgeos, eclined like y throw oflF V the third eos, dative of books, reek, in on tres, three n ending d femin- I illative, )i'oducea THE THIRD OR CONSONANT DECLENSION. 21 certain chnngen, w]iich will be seen in thp fnll • aniples :— ^^ ''"^ tollowmg ex- (1.) Kouns of ,vWch the nominative itsolf is the stem. EXAMPLEii. N. & V. Labor, Gr. Labor-is, D. Labor 1, A. Labor-em, Ab. Labor-e, labour, of labour, to labour. lHl)our. from, with, or by labour. Labor-es, Labor-um, Labor-i-bus, Labor-es, Labor-i-bu3, Plimtl. ^- & V. Arbor, G. Arbor-is, I>. Arbor-i, A. Arbor-em, Ab. Arbor-e, 2. a tree, of a tree, to a tree, a tiee. from, with, or l>y a tree. Ar ijor-es, Arbor urn, Arbor-i-bus, Arbor-es, Arbor-I-bus, N". & V. Consul, G. Consul is, D. Consill-i, A. Consul-em, a o(msul of a consul to a consul -. _v,..„v.^ wii, a consul, t'onsul-es Ab. Consul-e, fron., with, or Constl-ibus, by a consul Consiil-es, Consiil-ura, Consiil-i-bus, Consul-es, N. & V. Anser G. Anser-is, i>. Anser-i, A. Anser-em, Ab. Ansur-e, 4. labours of labours to labours, lal»our.s. from, with, or by labours. trees. of trees. to trees. trees. from, with, or hy trees. consuls. of consuls. to consuls. consuls. from, with, or by consuls. a goose. of a goose, to a goose, a goose. from, with, or by a goose. Anser-es, Anser-um, Anseri-bus, Anser-es, Anser-i-bus, geese, of geese. to geese. from, with, or by geese. i' jyiii 22 Singular. N. cfe V. Mos, Cf. Moris, I^- Mori, A- Mor-em, Ab. More, LATIN GIIAMMAH. 5. niaiiner. of manner. to manner. manner. from, with, or by manner. Mor-es, Mor-um, Mor-i-bus, M'6r-e3, Mor-I-bus, Plural. ^- & V. Mater, Gr. Matr-is, D. Matr I, A. Matr-em, Ab. Matr-e, manners. of manners. to manners. manners. from, witlj, or t»y manners. Matr-es, Matr-um, Matr-i-bus, Matr-es, Matr-i-bus, mothers. of motJiers. to motJiers. mothei-s from, with, or l>y mothers. a motlier. of a mother. to a motlier. a mother. from, witli, or by a mother. . „ ^'onhfor Exercise. iiiose nouns in whiVi, „„ • ^ • fuHl... el.,u,,e ,,„,,^ y,^,-"^;^ ;'°, a-;^™. without any o. , Examples. N.l'V-f^6x (stem) ,. 1- ^ •(_ res), / '*^"'°- Re^-es, I^.' b2T faking. Ileg..um, ^'^"'' ^'•^";' ^^tl., or Rei-r-bus, by a king. ' Plural. kings. of kings. to kings, kings. from, with, or by kin, «;•/ ral. nianners. of manners, to manners. manners. from, witlj, oi- by manners. mothers. of mothei's. to motliers. mothej-s •om, with, or by mothers. I'ison; color, 'r, patris, a *\'er; miXUer, the throat, d only in the e other cases, le stem, it is >n practice of into r, as in in all those before it as a which the ithout any kings. of kings. to kings. kings. with, or Ijy kings. THE THIRD OR CONSONANT DECLENSION. 23 \ Sinrpdar, 2 j;,-^y /Dux (stem) , . I due), )'^ leader. Duc-es, a Due-is, of a leader. Dfic-um, ^- Due-i, to a leader. Duc-i-bis, Ab. Duc-e, from, with, or by Duc-l-bus, a leader. 3. ■s^ XrY /liadix (stem) ( radio), j^^oot- Radic-es, G. Radic-is, of a root. JJ. Radio-i, to a root. A. Radic-em, a root. Ab. Radic-e, from, with, or by a I'oot. Net y.Lex (stem leg), a law. *Le-es, Plural. Radic-um, Radic-i-bus, Radices, Radio-i-bus, G. J). A. Leg'-em, Ab. Leg'-e, Leg-is, Leg-J. of a law, to a law. a law. from, with, or by a law. Leg'-um, Ije:A"-i-bus, Leg-es, Leg-i-bus, 5. N" ctV l^rex (stem) _ , ■ ^ ffi"eg), J "^ ^^'^^^- Greg-es, ^ Greg-is, of a flock. Greg-um. ^' Greg-i, to a flock. Gre>i-bus A. Greg-em, a flock. GrfeL ' Ab.Greg-e, from, with, or Gre>i bus by a flock. ' leaders. of leaders. to leaders. leader-s. from, with, or by leaders. roots. of roots. to roots. roots. from, with or by roots. laws. of law.s. to laws. hfws. from, with, or by laws. flocks. of flocks. to flocks. flocks. from, with, or by flocks. Words for Exercise. /•o^/^c-«, the thumb ' '^''"''' '"'' ^"^'^'™^'^-' P0II.X, -Ss'the^S phJ^te :::?':^ -^- -^ich belongs to this class "'■''Hsnodoubtthes^rUrdas^^iL^'Sle!"'"''^''^ """"= '" '^^ 24 I-ATIN GRAMMAR. tlle nominative. ' ' ""* """slants before tile , of Singular. N.&V Metas (stom ) ■ ( aetat), j '^^^ «Sp- !;• ;^^,^!^is, of an acre. Ab. Aeiac-e, from, with/or by an age. Examples. 1. Aetat-es, Aetat-iim, Plural. Aetat-i-bus, Aetat-es, Aetat-I-bus, ages. of ages, to ages. ages. from, with, 01- by ages. ue. N.&V ■'"^"'^"sC.stein) . ?• ,y?^.^?t-l' to virtue. Ab. Virtut-e, from, with, or by virtue. Virtut-es, Virtut-um, Virtut-I-bus, Virtilt-es, Virtut-i-bus, 3. ^•^fefMlIesfstem, , V. ( milit), I "^ soldier. Eliirt-es, D M^?/-'' °f^ soldier. A M-3^-'' toasohli.r. A. MiU-em, a soldier Miirt-um, Miirt-i'-bus, Milit-es, by a soldier. """""''> f^m, with, or virtues. of virtues. to virtues. virtues. from, with, or by virtues. soldiers. of soldiers, to soldiers, soldiers. by a soldier. d: a ?• f'^l- f^«-™. A. Art em, *":;,'• f*?-'"'^- Ab Arf- £ r . , ^"- Art-es, • ^'^^■^' from, ^vith, or Art-I-bus by art. ' by soldiei-s. arts. of arts. to arts. ? rts. from, with, or by arts. the stem of Jcfore the s of iral ages. of ages. to ages. ages. rom, with, or by ages. virtues. of virtues. to virtues. virtues. )m, with, or by vii'tues. soldiers. of soldiers, to soldiers, soldiers, n, with, or •y soldiei"s. arts. of arts. to arts. y rts. , with, or by arts. THE THIRD OR CONgONANT DECLENSION. 25 Singular. N.&jMons (stem) 5. G. D. A, Ab. . moun- mont), / t,iin. MoKt-is, of a mountain. Mont i, to a mountain. Mont-em, a mountain. Mout-e, from, with, or by a mountain. Mont-es, Monti-um, Monti-bus, Mont-es, Monti-bus, Plural. y c-'>'OX(stemnoct),anight, G. Noct-is, I>. Noct-i, 6. A. Noct-em, Ab. Noct-e, of a niofht. to a night. a night. from, with, or by a night. Noct-es, Nocti-um, Nocti-bus, Noct-es, Nocti-bus, mountains. of mountains. to mountains. mountains. from, with, or by mountains. nights. of nights. to nights. nights. from, with, or by nights. Words for Exercise, pars, pan-is [ S '^ ' """'•'«^' »«»■<»(-,■,, a priest- ainS^'llr„r£;'''ir !,'„2 1;|",:^ »";"f ■» «■• non,i„a«ve Ke..it,ye ,,1,„,,I, a, i, „„ i„ the "f^.Z' 1 ' ' '"'"''. "" '•" »' the u.. . owe. i.. e.,i„ i.™b..,/^r.rii/^;xncAi;°i''°y„x modified ; sometimes hnfhlL' I ''''''^*'^ preceding it «rd. .. i„ ;.,„rof\vS fhfLts -:" " ^"^ -™ Examples. Singular. 1 nr t N.cferOratio (stem) ^^''^«^- V.I oration), /^«Peech. Oration-es, speeches. ^ Oration-18, of a speech. Oration-um nf by speeches. 26 M\ ilfilliii Jil m Singular. LATIN GRAMMAR. N.,A.JN6m?n7sTem) * ^^^^^^^ &^. ( nomin), /aname. Nomin-a, 07 a name. ' ^•,A., (Caput (stem) , ^^ ^ V. ( capit), /a tead. Caplt-a, AbSt'' f *°^.^^^^^- Caplt-i-bus, ^b.tapit-e, from, with, or Capit-I-bus ' by a head. ' 4. a man. Homin-es, names. of names. to names. ft'onj, with, or hy names. heads. of heads. to heatls. from, >vith, or by heads. men. of men. to men. men. -N". tfefHomo (stem) ^- I homin), / u' , . by men. AT - ^^^^"s for Fxerche ntag; &., laclk milk ' ' ■''''""■'-'•'• » fla^I' of light- i-his class also iucludpc! flm ««„* whose stems end inTor V , J'^'T '"^ ''' ^'''^ os, is changed into . as is usiml wh "" -f ' ''^'^'^"^^ ^^^'^'^'^ ^^'^ ■' vowels (see § 23, note) HenL f] '" '* "''^"^'' *'^*^^^«^ *^o c,. , Examples. N.,A.,|Genu3(stem) , '^^"^«^- by kinds. names. of names. to names. from, with, or by names. head s. of heads. to heads. from, )vitlj, or by heads. men. of men. to men. men. •om, with, or by men. ' I'lver; cm'- Lsh of Jight- us and os, i cases the s etween two Sr-is stands crus-is. kinds. of kinds. to kinds. a, with, or by kinds. THE THIRD OR CONSONANT DECLENSION. 27 times, of times. Singnlar. o „, N.,A.,rTempus(«tom) . ^^**^'«^- *SfV. ( tempos), j ^in^e. Tempor-a, by times. ;^fet;S.L^7-:l;,^S/'-^'. a side; ..„., ''«'»■-.■», a shore : ,•,.,■,,," ™,,' '"'«"-'»• " ™m. Rupi, ■A- Rup-em, Ab. Rup-g, rocks. of rocks. to rocks. rocks. bird of a rock. Rupi-um, to a rock. Riipi,bus, a rock. Run-es , rocks. Cm!>. o .,v j^ordsfor Exercise, ^tvis, a citizen ; dassis. a flppt • vp^H'^ « «.„,..>. + - • :d ; 6ms, a sheep • /e^;,. ^ ,:' .' If ? ! ^^^ ^^^^^ i «^i^, a bird ; Ovis, a sheep • feli VZ ' - ' ^ ^f '^'^ defeat : sedes. a ..e£/ "^ ' ^ '•"*' ""'^^^' ^ «l°«d eludes. a 28 LATIN GRAMMAR. «*. for „,,* .„„ „,,„_. ;,;« :;?„■;;£' "J,;'™... s. .1.. „4°»d' liiM Examples. Sivffular 1 »T , N., A., J Mare (stem) ^^wra^. ^- M^M^' ^^::- Jg:i-m, of the sea. Ab.Mar-i, from., tl, or Ma rf bt'' . to the seas. b^the^ea ^^"'- ^^''^'^' -ith, or by 2. the seas. Animali-um, Animali-bus, Anirnali-bus animals, of animals. to animals. from, with, or by animals. ^•\^-'Mni«ial(.stomani- *v ) mali), an animal Animali-a, ^. Animal-is, of an animal JJ. Animal-i, to an animal Ab. Animal-i, from, with, 01' by an animal, ^•,A.,|Calcar(stem) ^' •feV. ( calcari), j ^ spur. Calcari-a, Cr. Calcar-is, of -i qt^„^ n ^ - • D. Calcar I f ^ Calcari-um, Ab CalpJrT f to a spur, Calcarl-bus Ab.Calcar-1, from, with, or Calcarl-bus by a spur. Words for Exercise. ^^, :::^:£t^^-^^'^ -'. » net, ^ spurs. of spura. to spurs. from, with, or by spurs. i 'I ill isM EEUARKS ON THE TIIIUD DECLEN SI ON. 29 S CHAPTER VIII. KEMARKS ON SOME CASBS OP THE Trnnx. r.. In words, the sj,? \ ^ ,^',^ ^i:;!' -.r''^ ^"'-"'""^'^^ «*-''' be fovn^ed in m instead of J,'' .l' ," '^^•-'-t--, '-^'i^t other words, m is „sually prXred nu . i',' ^""^'"'-^ "^ make the accusative re-,I • ' , "" '' iollowing lioarseness; .?^,-, thirst t^^;"'-" """'•^■•^•'^^•. '-^ rule ; ruvi^, following luunes o to^J tV\"^''^ t'- ^"•^"' ->•' *'^e harvest ; and 7ulvis, a ship. ' ' '^ ^''>' ^ '''^«*"'. the towns in e, as Praenesl Ca^r P ^^° ^'''^ "^'"*^'' "^'"'^s of ablative in g. '' ^''"'' ^'"'^ regularly make their 3. With all adjectives in ^•.,^•.,e, and er,^.,. ^. 'srhTtrr,'^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^- between . a..d '• '^-STJtitt «-^-*^ between t;e.j.er. .v^pipl^ T"' ^ ^Y■^■,^mber, a shower- *eown, only 's^un "'''"' ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ and 'r* 30 iiiiii I-ATIN GRAMMAR. ablative «X« 71/; • ^"'"'•!''"^i^*'« = as a^.r/a:., adjectives of this class have eexcl siv^^v • '"*' Poor;;.W;.., an adult; ro..^^ „' 'iJ ^^ P^'uper, master of; ,nnee,s, chief /anil r'^/u^'o^h:;"^* P^ur or couple, has either ;a^ „; ;!«,,*''' «"b8tantiv. ;,./., a 3. With participles m rts (genitive ntis) ■ hut in fl,« Rtruction callerl flm .T\ ^ *• ,"' V '^"i^ '^ the con- § 30. The Nominative Plural in ia occurs- § 31. The Genitive Plural ends in »m_ • ^" *^° ™''' ''"^-' « slower; „,.., a leather'bag; lUf fill the three « : as audax, jliitive sapienfS t'Z. But some ly : as pauper, i)f ; ivi;iofi, not two others. «RKKK NOUNS OP THE THIRD DLCLENs. 33 stantivr equal, pur, a t in thf" con- thoy always I of K omul us. e ablative, as viz., fnmes, iiies, ablative ', as those ■ e.g., mare, I, animalin, ve singular as gravis, icid. Com- as amplior, ra, and com.' ?, navium; n. form their a prophet; . bird. ther bag; ^ ^ ^ ^i Itnter, a whorry ; venter, the b^-lly ■ „nd whose genitive plural is imbrivnj ^t^i 3. in monosyllabic -vords with a stem endin . ^^"''^s. sC ^/;.^: r'V^^''"; -:^)'^-' •ivo^o.^.^'- ^stcm f/e^O, genitive (/e«^m,„ (co,..,)are S 95^ ««"«es. ti,e acc„.ative Mu'rjr <:':",*:;. ™^ - ••• -*e accusative plural ownt-s n»„>7.\ ' • ^'^- ^^ ^'"'"*» plural z^riJ or t^X ' ''""'''*' ^''^^^ accusative GREEK NOUNS OP THE THIRD DECLENSION. thf'same S/as'h^TS ^in^tL^T' •"^^^^"^"-^ ^" *''« nominative Greek rather than the fatiALlensron "'''' "''" ^^^^ ^«"''^' ^^^ ' ^p^:iST^^:r¥S^:^ % ^ ^^*-^ ^^ - as also take the Greek ^eniVivr^nV^"'*'^^/""'^'^'- ^^ny P;iMvi°",;;„;I; • "' "■"'"• «'°"'™ •""«.■ N.&y._D6mu-s, a house. Domu-s ^^"'■"^- ,„, ^'- I^omu-s, ,f , ,,,,,. ^,^^^^^ ^^ ^^^.^^^ ^^ houses. r>. Domu-i, to a house. A Domu-m a Jiouse. Ab. Domo, from a house, or from home. Domi-bus, to houses. Domo-s or domus, nouses. Domi-bus, from, with, or by houses. CHAPTER X. THE FIFTH OR e DECLENSION. adcliiict of ;'"' ''' ""^'""'^^^ ^^ *---d by the usua! cHSS;;™;.;;:?J^SnS.tt^:r' ^«' Pr^fly ^reaWng. not a thus answers tothose wo 'dsof the fi '/f.,"'"^^^^{'=^*^°Vf the first. It ends iu t- (>;). ^^'^ *'"* <^»^ek declension, whose stem SriK/iilar, N. dr Y. Dies, G. Diei, D. Die i, A. Die-m, Ab. Die, Examples. 1. a day. of a day. to f day. a (lay. from, with, or by a day. Dies, Die-rum, Die-bus, Dies, Die-bus, N.&T. Re-g, G. Re i, D. Re i, A Re-m, a thing, ne-s, Ab. Ke, from, with, or by Re-bus, a thing a thing, of a thinsr. to a thinsr. Res, Re-rum, Re-bus, Res, Plural. days of days. to days days. from, with, or by days. things. of things. to things. things. from, with, or by things. ul is somefimes THE FIFTH OR e DECLENSION. 35 Words for Exercise. Acies, a point; effigies, a likeness; fades a face- f1/?Wc//c"'4i^culine only "'"""'' '^"^ "' *^^'-' conS?;i7^^:t'::^"gnS'''''f,7''" - i« --tunes ce.hng tlie i in thes^ t^vo cases 'loiwl,'.'' ^y"r«^''-^i-. the . pre- Hhort when preceded by a consonant -"IcJ';;;^/' but S' '^ " ^"""'' ^"* r.Si;7Sr[Ki;'^^^&;^'^:K;;'^^''^.to tin; declension, and complete; all the rest L uTeSv in tlu i, i ''"^'"^'1' "'"' *''« I'l"''^' nominative and .accusative of the i.iural '"°"'^^'' "''^^ "'«-'*t only in the and .a..^. timber ; -^^.^e^t/S.SUt^.JtSW^thr '^^ CHAPTER XI. PECULIARITIES AND IRREGULARITIES IN THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES, of i?ich \htTre"ZZlTT'''^ substantives decline both nouns jnrLyuramn. The same ^ the ent' {".•^/"•«"'''"" (an oath), genitive pondo, apound; theiameff7thelifl r./ '"f"'' '•'^^'^•"blanco; beta, gamma; and any uTrdrlh 'b t .. "^. ''° alphabet, as a/pha used as such. V^erbs howevl 1^' ''^'°'J* •'""'- ""l^stantives, are complete declension in thTr. lla" Ts JlSn'f""-^*^^^^'^'^^' ''^"^^ ^ genitive so-;ie«rf/, of writing -daHv-P I /*'!'' •''''■'''''■"' ^^^''t^ng : or by writing. "'''^"'"''^'''^> ^"^ing ; ablative scn-6e«rfo, from, with, /^6L^lTrdr"n '*si!!\T-"'"' "'^'^ "^ '''' p'"'-^i •• -'^ «'•--■ ---^ ; riage'; »«a»;.:'na;:bo;ty fmS^the waH^nf'^^'^^^ ""^'^'«^' ™*"^- and many others. ' ^^"^ "^ * *^"^y J c^ii^i^me, wealth. m 36 LATIN GRAMMAR. ax.d aiS"iuTh?pluS:i*"^^ ^*^« ^°« -^--g in the singular lingular. Aecles, a temple. -^ '/«<«. -water. Auxi/ium, help. CarcSr, a prison. Ca.i(nt7n, a fort. ^^m«iKw, the place of meeting Co/>;a, plenty. ^ /^i/u'.s', the end. Fortana, fortune. Orafia, favour. ImpMlmontum, a hindrance. Limra, a letter pf the alpha))et. Ludii!^, a play or school. Opera, Avork. 0/?/.v (genitive of om), holn Jfn.^fr>r,n, a beak. ' «S'a/, salt. Tabula, tablet or picture. -^«fe9, temples, or a house. WY»a^, waters, ormineral springs Auxi/ia, auxiliary troops Carc^res, prisons, or barriers in a racecourse. Castra, a camp. Cojnma, the meeting, orassembly ^--opine, military forces. Fhips, the boundary, territory. Fortrniae, gifts of fortune. t-rutiae, thanks. Imphllmmta, baggage. LUth-ae, an epistle. Z^/f?/, public games. Oph-ae, workmen. Opp.R, wealth. Rof-a, the platform in theForum n,?\ "^''t "'" ^'itty w-ords. liilndae, writing tablets, being wanting: as gSitTve^, "J ^f" ' ''^"; ^'T'^'.*^" nominative rom Ultlo), of dominion ArSfromX ' ''"''"'' (from i«"^ t'le wants the gen'ti^e. n.s force hi. i n H ' P^?''^^'" complete, but native, onfy the accusativeS; and hi' tlTf ""'-^T'^^^ ^^'^ ""™i- is complete, .f.e,, ^v>i,„«, ,S« tL S^^^ *he plural m the singular only in the abktW. K f l^ aM,P, (cireuit),/.?^,;"(tfroat and , l^*^;'' F "'"^^ ^« complete: inclination, occurs on y'in this ablati^ t ^^ ^c'^^ '^>'^"^«' ^y order ; natu, by birth OMi^r ^ ablative form. So also y«,v,w, by learned by practice and o^t'atbf "^""^ «' *^^« ^^^^^ -'^^t b^ tiv . and'rordiSSr bllong^^ dTffe°^ T\' '^^^ - *h« --- called Heteroclita-- ^ *° different declensions. They are t^^^P^r^rn. according to the sUonT Ipir'"'"^^ "l^-^^^ *^« accusative commonly t,..,pg,.go%;,;7. 7-^°°^//^ while the ablative is 2. Some su£tantiv:Xcti"titf:!^:rf.!„«?°"^^Tg *? tl^« third. - '*' ^"= Bccoiid ana lourth de- I the singular a house. ineral springs. roops. r barriers iu a , or assembly. ;ea. , territory, rtune. n theForum. ords. lets, 5t in others. nominative ti ; (/if ion is inlernP.ciilnia Ip. Fors, iigular. Of laative, and 3 complete, ■e vkis, tlie iiplete, but s the nomi- the plural vords exist complete : SpontS, by JKNKTi, by id must be PECULIARITIES AND IRREGULARITIES OP DECLENSION. 37 rtr;r;4^eSr:n;i":j 't;."f ?^, rr^r' "^'^"'-"' - — the case especiaUrwitrSe .'rrf.i fl"'"' ^"' fpeakers. This is c&pressus, a cypress /L TTiii W -'''' ' ««/«"'-"'^. ^ bay tree ; 3 Some flu'cfuate b^ ";„ fe thTrA S'ttV^h^r V'"'"^- ^dplebes, the commonalty, gen tive « L oJ ^/^^^ ^ ■''' P''^' eemtive rS^jidetis mud rhimH. ^ "'"'^ P'"^'^ ox pkbn ; reqmcs, rest, 4. Those fluctuating between the first nnrl fiffu j i long, to the second" Js,>„™ ° ."^l? ™T' T"'',""' T?"' '"■ anlfthe^pCrS'-J-rS^^^^^ •/■|i^c?M (masculine), a joke. Ldcm (masculine), a place. Carbams (feminine), linen Caelum, heaven. Frenum, a bit. Hantriim, a hatchet. Ostre.a, oyster. Sibi/us, hissing. Tartarus, the lower regions. _, unura foi^L^„V£get;;fve"t™ffT„'. r".,''"""'"'*' ■" «■» regularly from it :_ ""S"lar, but the other cases are formed '""rtiaLeXf • e-'«-'«. -Mw, \wieicnea;, leramine wmem, r in tl.: fenTitliiela ^ilJte": a^n.n" '.'a^f?,^!'^'!-^;*^'''^^ »"* «- « before the feimmne mcra, neuter w/ov//,, T i i j- ^^"'=*'"^««> f^ssam- (sacred) ;..;/5r (rough), ;v;.V« ; S ■ • 4 wSnf f-'*"''^^^'^*^'"""^ tl^L^^e"^ I !''■■>•» Ilhcrum; m?^o-(wre c ed r?im ij "■"' '"'•"•'"«' ^'*«- (free). />msv>,v« ;jro,,;.ft.«m ; and those tith^' ffi "' '"'"'^J"" d'l-osperous IS tl.e only^uljective in ur (complrf g'^/"'""""^ ''«''"'^'' "-^"'er «'''"'-«4 ginally also ended in is ZTTT' ,^'\ "masculine ori with the single exc^pti:; of J , S .IT '^^^^ ^" *'' always throv^ out exepr>+ i^ It ^ ^''*'''*^ ^^^ r is line singula^ ^ " *^^ r^ominative of the mascu- The following is a complete list of tliem :-- «-.nr^"'"'- ..J'^"*-- GenitivePlural. Masculine. -4cer (sharp), Alacer (lively), Campester (level), Cf.lgber (famous), CSler (swift), Equester (equestrian). Paluster (marshy), PMester (on foot), /'i'Z^er (rotten), Salaber (wholesome), Silvester (woody) r«-m<«- (of the land), V6mcer (flying), afncris, campestris, Celebris, C^fSri.i, ^qucs(7'is, pdlustris, phh'stris, pittris, salubris, silvestris, terrcstris, t'Olucris, (Icrc, alacre, campestre, cPlehre, ce/f're, ^qucstre, pdlitstre, pMcstre, putre, sdlubre, silveatre, tevrestre, vOlucre, acri-um. alacri-um. campestri-um. cPlcbri-um. celer-um. ^questri-um. palustri-um. pMestrt nm. putri-um. sdlubri-um. silvestri-um. tejTestri-wn. I. ucri-um. 4 x-^-'j ""jvuti^cs ui tills Class. N. G. D. : A. : V. ] Ab. ] V. ■ inct termina- iiine, and um. w the second ?oocl), femin- inine misera. he e before the ? sdcer (sacred), ing thee .-rs — 'i ; t'tbcr (free), '• (in'osperous), fcr (from (jevo 'i/o' ('•nngiug liter satufUm, ADJECTIVES AND THEIR . ECIEKSIOH. 39 and ,V for both the masTuline an^ f ™ termination.-i, for the neuter as : 3u te -^ f ""'"""' "'"' ' »'' "«' the third de'cIens^rSitSSdlt.-. ^" '^'""^ "' N. Ct. D. A. V. M. F. M. Bonu-s, Boni, Bono, Bon-um, Bone, Alj. Bono, Sacer, Singular. J- N. bona, bonum, bonae, boni. bonae, bono, bona-m, bonum. bona, bonum. bona, bono. N. V. fr. Saori, D. Sacro, „„.,<,„, A. Sacru-m, sacra-m, Ab. Sacro, sacra, B5nl, bonae, Bono-rum, bona-rum, Bonis, bonis, Bono-s, bona-s, ^oni, bonae, Bonis, bonis, bona. bono-rum. bonis. bona. bona. bonis. sacra, sacrum. Sacri, sacrae, sacrae, saori, sacro. sacrum, sacro. V' [ Miser. misera, G. Miseri, miserae, D. Misero, miserae, misero Miseris sacrae, sacra. Sacro-rum, sacra-rum, sacro-rum Sacris, sacris. sacris. Sacrp-s, sacra-s, sacra. Sacns, sacris, sacris. mJserum. Miseri, miserae, misera. miseris, misera-s, miseris, M. y" I Acer, G. Acris, D. Acri, A. A(ire-m, Ab. Acri, miseris. misera. miseris. Suiijula7: F. Serfs, acris, acri, acro-m, acri. N. acrg, acris. acri, acrg. acri. M. &F. Acres, Acri-um, Aei-i-bu5, Acres, Aori'bus, acri- 5. acri-um. acri-bus. acri -a. acri-bus. W 40 I-ATIN GRAMMAR. Examples op Adjectives of the V. G. D. A. Ab, N. V. G. D. A. Ab. M. &P. Fortis, Fortis, Forti, Forte-m, Forti, Altior, Altior-is, Altior-I, Altior-em, Altior-e, Singular N. forte. fortis. forti. forte, forti. altius. altior-is. altior-i. altius. altior-g. 1. M. &F. Fortes, Forti -um, Fortr-bus, Fortes, Forti-bu3, 2. Altior-es, Altior-um, Altior-ibus, Altior-es, Altior-ibus, Third Class. Plural. N. forti-a. forti- um. fortr-bus. forti-a. forti-bus. altior-a. altior-um. altior-ibus. altior-a. altior-ibus. N. V. G. D. A, Examples op Adjectives op the Fourth Class o: J '• Plural. Singular. M. & F. Sapiens, Sapient-is, Sapient-i, Sapient-em, Ab. Sapient-e, y' I Audax, G. Audac-is, D. Audao-i, A. Audac-em, Ab. Audac-e, N. sapiens. sSpient-is. sapient-i. sapiens, sapient-e audaz. audac-is. audac-i. audax. audac-e. M. &F. Sapient-es, Sapienti-um, Sapienti-bus, Sapient-es, Sapienti-bus, Audac-es, Audaci-um, Audaci-bus, Audac-es, Audaci-bus, N. sapienti-S. sapienti-um. sapienti-bus. sapienti-a. sapienti-bus. audaci-a. audaci-um. audaci-bus. audaci-a. audaci-bus. contracted f/.^;„^ir„tlLlti,"£!;tS^ !f P-" ^^- - the &c. ; plural dltes, neuter dltia. ''^' ^^'^'t^^^ '^*'<-^. dative dltl |i£\o-ti;fZVo?^S'rhldT^ -son in I'a.se with Y cases in ? anxms, -rded as a iuperlative of com- 3. i). rst). eatest). COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES Positive. Multus (much), 48 Parens (small), ^I'qnam, indocl. (worthJt'ss), /r^Mndecl. (frugal),/,.i7^,j/^-o^^ jUuns ; phiral, 2ilure8 and 'pliira. minor (smaller), nequior, minimus (smallest). nequisslmus. frilgCdissimua. ^Sri ionS^it^J^Sr (ir'^Stly"!*''^' t^-^''-bstantives, la ives are expressed by para X ,se4 ,/» • ^y°""S°')- Their super! (forrner) have "o Vitive/ n t £ m n r;-^''^'^'^^''^- "'"' P^ior superlative noi./.«-,««, ja very conlmon'!° "" ''""'P'^^ative, but ti.e V'^''^^<^7^Sriri'Tn'''^ ^- - corresponding positive occurs it slightly iffor. i^V ■ H '^''''^'''^ '• ='"'1 where a of comparison. The foffiSt coa^^^^^ ^l"- ^-o other d^ree^ J<"»1 :- ^ ^^ contains the principal examples of this C;/^m (on this side), rf/ft-i^wSo^^^^^^^^^ .,, , Superlative. £^tra (outside of), eJZ outer) '''^'^' ''^'/'i'"'^' ^""•■'** ''^ «»« «ide). '' <"•«''■'■"' "■< or extinum (outer most). There is a plural of the positive, e^m, which signifies U/trd (beyond), Iiifnl (below), ulth'io)- (farther), infh-iov (lower). ' foreigners. " idtlmus (farthest, last). tiifimus or iinus (lowest). wS/'i:1iriSl?i^oLS'Si:^g'^- «- inhabitants of the lower ni the west of Itafy. '"' ""^^ '"^ *^« "^"le Mare Infcrmn, thelea /)'/?•« (within), J^'-op? (near), -^Oi;^ (after). inth-ioi' (inner), propior (nearer), posih-ior (later), intXmus (innermost). prnxlmus (nearest). postremus (last). ■^.. rlt: titivc i n "r\ "":■"'""' » •""»" ("pp«™«). thSmp?;!;^''^'"^ 'l^ '"^^ee number of adje'-fiv- «>,-■-] uieii nieaniiig, cannot have either a rnm,.a,.„.r-"' "'''■"' °^ account of golden, iron, dead, &c. comparative or a superlative, such u ii I-AT^N GRAMMAR. i CHAPTER XIV. THE NUMERALS. 2. Ordinal Numerals, i.Klicatinc. the o,.Ip, of objects- t,s,..7>.», +1 7 ' °'' succession '-4 the ;i:i^;;:r''^''"^^^^^"''-> the second; 3- Distributive Numeral ri«»^r i twice; ..>, three times, A^c. "'^' °"''^' ^^^' 5. Multiplicative Numerals denotin. . times as muol, "^^ ^ »^ "•*'"■ "'■•« adjectives of «„,e e^Si' «;/''' 'f, '"»"' "'« l"'""' regular aeutei- substantive, ^emttvel 'v™' ';"'*'" '= <' ablative mWlfm^ fu>a ca.tmZTLZ T^^^^^^ 1''"'" ^'"''' ^^'"t «f fl'«' one house. ' ^" ^ ' """'^ lUUrac, one letter; uiiae aalu% !cIinah]o. fe plural iigain is 'ia is a ive and tives of M. N. & V. Duo, a. Duo -rum, D. & Ab. Duo- bus, A. Du6-s, M. N. & V. Tres, fi. Tri-um, D. & Ab. Tri-bus, A. Tres, '■(. F. duae, dua-rum, dua-bus, dua-s, 3. F. tres, tri-um, tri-bus, tres, N. duo. duo-rum. duo-bus. duo. N. tri-a. tri-um. trib-us. tri-a. Nom~Ambo, ae, o, both, is declined like duo. ^/ts^t;'^Ke-rt^-^f^-??^'s: i^ ('.'. ;< flM' 46 LATIN ORAAfMAR, I— I 5 w o J is m . - an : 2 « « 2 S ,5 -3 ;^ - ~ « u I £ S 'S 95 s 'C! >— ,r: o », '" ''■ ^ 'S 'r" S " t; c = ,t « a a S ,2 s :: 7, 5 > r H ':: X A^ *j -^ o "^ i5 ^ ,- a ^ +3 "^ 'i- «j '- I" r ^ I* ^j -^ Zi u. '- ""• i** '-v >C T^ 'C^ 05 B 5 o s s J o S 1^ a.i: 3 .2 '- u fl i f tc -w S -1 o '-^ xD -w 'C o iS 1-; > -H T" 5^ S ^ o'^jo ^ a ■1* < f- --* K* r^ *-i "— i.' *> >-i i_< L_ L, ^ ' ■ ?<><' '^><- '^t^ -^ ^^ "^ ~ ' ^* T* I.- — ^ > '^ b-4 r o ? 3 V^ in 3 a w iS " ^ > > j.^ © to s S.s E.^^ 03 lii >3 li) > a ^^ > u !s 2 s 3 ^nS M > 3 •M I.-4 ■4^ «i> JH c r/l 5b tc ■3 a > > a l(N 111 i£ si 111 -w IB l"J JO'S -3 C . of 09 IV >i to . a CQ IV 'S to * ID a OQ to ,9- li) — . ,_ — 3 ijgH) ,i 111 oj M ^ -"-> ,:^ i5 S M s - I? 3 fl t; ' V s *j * ij Is 3 a li ~ «! S "' IM CO w ,D ») ^ o 3 :;: v= iv -M li-a SCSI'S Eb.xPr^ S S a 3 3 ,^ m o o 3 IV i5 e . ^ _ „ ' - - - C ,3 « y -:3 i _, J,lv ._ ^- ^ _ ^. 'O W *j O" o* 00 00 10 a" a i C O -w - ^' ~ 3 U ,4 3 o -ti ,S ^' " 3 q '^ _h i, - i-v li Q^ c 'i i3 a --^ So 3 m a S ■- a 3.J5 cr-3 oi3 iSi 3 if s ^ »-H , o 00 OS© W C^ 00 QOOOOOOSO"-S'-> — ^WWt^GCOOSOOOOO OQwOpoOOO O o :r o o '-"^(NIO'^ICOI-.OOSOOOO — =SS I-' c) »c —'_- !!;-_-_-- ^ t^ **- .'•' (-^S O O C; C: O I—I lO O O Q f-l ITS O li't' : Tiil 48 LATIN GKAAIMAR. liill! JSles ^t^J^:^ ZS::^t '^f-l °^ -finals with ing from that of the singular as TutZZ^'' P''"'''' "" ^'^^''''^ ^ean two letters ; blnae aedes, two hoiSs ' ^° "''"'P*^ ' ^»««« ^*««^««. i>.S:L|T7;i'^rj-d '• ";S. ^^-'^ «'^J-*«' " the first » is expressed by :^f^^^^-^S&l\f:^^^^^^^^^ by ordinal numerals «e/»<«a6re.»«„,^«/«<«,, the year S "*'''«"««« ortmi,c„ice.sima«K.. ending in «,..•«,,, denotes of how nmnv navt?r °. ^^^/^t'^'e numerals', more than eight in common nsot iL •- ^ ''^ ^'^'"'' ^^^^'^ ^^e no Simplex, onefold. ' '^" • /)M^?fec, twofold ^'iincvpkx. fivefold. 5'V?^fe, threefold '^e/>'''?W/7/ear, sevenfold. Qtmlruplex, fourfold '^cccmplrx, tenfold. h "*• Fractions nrp pvii..qc„„j u is dividedrar"'"'f \«^P'it ^■\?'^^'' ^'' ""'^ *''="^ ^h.t in which tho wh„; ' (.-..) that v t.?; ont'o S'z;:::t^^^^^ '7 '^-'^^ *«s^ &c. All other fractions a-^e exm-essed as n fUh "h' ^°"'7"* ^^ «^« P^^ts. iiii CHAPTER XV. THE PRONOUNS. .Uvided into i otj 1 °' '"""'*""™ They ar^ cardinals with liferent mean- binae litth-ae, I expressed by nal numerals ^tingentesimus g in anus is ion, class, or vicesmanus, ve numerals, consists ; as toyenaritis, a 'rah is very here are no e.c, a liun- ew. They nnquiplus, = 7; tertia the whole '«, quatuor five parts, intae = f ; ectives, ey are THE PRONOUNS. ^g 1. Personal or Substantive pronouns- f^nn t. /- .1, nos, we; ^,55, you. f^^^^ouns. ego, I; '^ forms of th^ particularly emphatic. ' '""'' *'^'' without thereby becoming Note 3. -The dative ,niJn i.s sometimes contracted into ml. i« l^v^lv ;iSt^:i^:rr::5ni ^--(-if;same), i.s declined as follows :- "''^ ^^^''^' I'^'^^^o^'^s, and N". G. D. A. M. Ipse, Ipsius, Ip:>i, Ipsum, SiitguJar, F. ipsa, ipsius, ipsi, ipsam, ipsa, ipsum. ipsius. ipsi. ipsum. ipso. Plural. M. F. N". Ipsi, ipsae, ipsi Ipsorum, ipsarum, ipsorum. Jpsis, ipsis, ipsis. fpsos, ipsas, ipsa. Ipsis, ipsis, ipsis. Ab, Ipso, find'^h-fcra: ^S'TJ ti ::;iT^ *'- -•«- ^- ^ henco we re eapHC or re i^sa. ^ ' ^""*'''''^' ^'^'"'Z^^^' > antl 7-ca/Jse-that is, /J/I7fr-' ^''' ^^"■''' Demonstrative Pronouns : viz Uc you and n^ T.'^T f^' ' ''''^ '•^^^«' '■*-^«''- that on. C; jou, and die, m, ulud, that one near him, or^yonde^ THE PRONOUNS. 61 They accordingly correspond to the three personal pronouns tiic, haec, hoc is declined as follows :— pionouns. N. G. I). A. Singular. M. F. N. Hic, haec, hoo. Hujus, hujus, hujus. Huic, huic, huic. Hunc, hanc, hoc. Ab. Hoc, hac, ' hoc. Plural. _M. F. j^ 5^' hae, haec, Horum, harum, horum. His, his, his. g.os, has, haec. His, his, Ms gemtwe istlus, illlus ; dative istl, illlX ^ ' ^ '' .lemSi^S:"^^ ^S *!"r. ^^-'--,-1-. li'- klc, took the antecedent to a relative. Its declension is !-' ' *^^' G. D. A. M. Is, Ejus, Ei, Eum, Singular Ab. Eo, F. ea, ejus, ei, earn, ea. id. ejus. ei. id. eo. Plural. M. F. li (ei), eae, Eorum, earum, _.,,„. lis (eis), lis (eis), iis (eis). fos, eaa, ca. lis (eis), lis (eis), iis (eis) N. ea. edrum. same niain.eiv deuvative tcZe//., c««'4«e being simply added to the p;«»<. declined like qui, the suffix raJ«e is ustd bo^h'^as a. Idyctivelnd as' .'siTr'r' '' TT^"''' ^'- «"'>S occurs only as a substantivo '\', *.f' ^stantive, but the neuter qukhaid defective in declension -for h .H"''l'l" and quidquid, moreover/are ablative L«^ eSt'in t),« «''"' *'!"'" *^° ^°™« ^^ only find the cuju,.cr,juVmodt ^ "'" expression cuicui modi (in an/ way) Sr am'/l.??/''/ Interrogative Pronoun tl.ere ar-e two forms- guis quae quid and qui, quae, quU. The difference is th-.f" facinm admisit ? what deed has he done 1 The declension of qm quae, quod is the same as that of the re Lte ,«^* and qu^s quae, quid differs from it onlv in 'rnomLTv ' quis and quid, "' ~" ""minati-Vc;} in a the first. I not mee. ^es is sometimes ote, tuopte, and 'A, sudmet ; and lasa which may iers : as nostras countryman of ry? There is, lich however is 'ho, which, or tt, N. quae quorum. , quibus. quae, quibus. 'oius, and the d even by the iftion ciwi, as plural quibus, Diatives : qui- and quitquis . Quirunque suffix cunque ^0. Quisquin iter quidquid loreover, are inly find the my way) for iwo forms : nee is that i feminine I only as a but quod jlension ot ! i^ronoun, •minativea THE PRONOUNS. 53 t.rs-;S^\EtHhfls^^^^ §61. Indefinite Pronouns exnrpcsa «-,„ ;„,i « •. The following are tho.se m:^^:,^ '^^i^ Jl"-' ^7- one" or "any one " X/^; ' n,?,] ^7^^- f ""^ °"^ '='«^' *1'^» "s, of some consider- able size. ^If'/uot, some m number. Qitotiis, what number in a series ? QuMlbet, as many aa you please. aIzt'"' "" """-"-^^^^^^^^^n:^;;;^:!;;!^;;!^ les both words ?rum u(rum or >r the second; ther of two, ia 53cting its de- ws, any). Por one. For its ives, decliu- express tlie igative, and tndcflnito. Unlihcf, of I y kind you j ase. unnfuft, of leeonsider- i size. 'o(, some lumber. ^bet, as y as you se. Jhapt er on THE VERB IN GENERAL. 55 CHAPTER XVI. THE VERB IN GENERAL. or fhS i^ '''^:^::^^;:^z^ ^ ^""^^;^^^" ^'^ -^-'^ -p--n verbs : as ,W;o, I ,fi^:f g,^^^^^ are called'static A verb expressing an action opifi. ^ '• *"''"' ^ «i*- Transitive Verbs fre those wh.V, transitive or intransitive. fnlly conceived M^ithout an ot ect ^^!T ""V"'''' *'^'^* <^^"""t ^e Such an object is in t eTccusititp .^^ ^ ''"'"^^■^' ''>' ^^o action. 8on ; ,l.»,nnn .,no, 1 purchase a house " '' "' '""' •^'''"'«' ^ ^^^^ '"y l.e.nselves a complete sonse-^a™" '^"t '^"nvey by I walk. '■ • asc«no, I run j ^rywor, I talk; ambulo, paLv|lttes.\?etironTr\h'^^^^^ -tive and the n..'iy be conceived as the subject of "a 2n ''^'"' '","^" '"^^^^^'^ ^•'"'^e. tl.e action, //»,., «maA., Sr Ij^o « "f *^»'V»''"^' "^ suflbrin/- a person may be coneeive. l-is n.;f !f ^"''*''' '^^ t'''^ ^'^thcr ; oT- r"r'o, 1 turn, passive Lit ff^^'""'"« the action on liiniself • as l^'^'or, i am dSig]Z^7r ddiih'mvSr''^ "'"?' ' '^^^^^^^^^ a... moved, or move myself In thp In tf' """'''"^ ^ '""^'«' '«'"•'">•. i be used in a reflective Wse. ^''"''' '^'-^ *'^^ P'-^^^iv-e is said to Intransitive verbs nn nni,r 1, tl.oy have a passive oX i^x tL tSirr,.""^''''"""^ Passive-that is, act of going is performe^;!, or ey go 'an^Z''?'^'^ = '' ''"^•' "^« jvith a.;aetir(t;;nsit?or mtratS "'^^'^ "^^^^^^ P^«-- ^^rm Deponent verbs; most ol ZTZetll^J.^^u;'^^^ -^^^ r^^r^ ^ ^^ tt^: - -^l ve form, but a passive am hcaten. Others, aga^Chave an actiU ?'"' ^ *''!^ '''^^^ ' ^"^ ^ »'« an miperfect or nTcompS^l !,^e?fo^rw '" ''^ *'" t™«es den^t- perfect r(«s„,s- 6«m, I have darp.l T.F / '?*'"'' •' ^» ""'^^o, I dare, have rejoiced ; soleo, I am aecuS onS r/v^ ''^''''' ■^^^"'•^"•' •v'"«. I cu«t„med;/... Itrust.^.:rS:"ll:t^^^^^^^^^^ I have been ac- ^u,ii^'J"T/^''^^ express actions whi^h ,.. ^^ r> »■ — i.s.n to a aehiiite ao-ent nnd «.i,;„i, '-'-"•' ao nut, or cannot 80" smgular. These are ca led W.'''' T'^ ^^^ "' ^^^- third per- »*nyU, it snows. '^''^^"'^ Impersonal verbs : ^s pluit, it ra£a ; til ] l;l "■ *■ -'.1 66 LATIN GRAMMAR. m^. 1. mm (modes of^x'prSln) :- '^' ^'^^^'"^ ^''^<=*' ^^^^ each three moods The Indicative, which sfnfoci o« i- fact, eitherin tKrm of r T "^ '^«»^it'on simply as a tion: I vvritea letter I Lnnrtw^v"' ^"^g^t•«"- o/a quest a letter ? ' ^ ^"^ "''^ ^"t^ng » letter ; Did he vmte either that a thing is t^ elne^'at o'''"'''^"^ " '^^'""^^"''. t,.e : as Wr.e doL your'na^! ^L^^s^laU „U S:?. ^"^"- noLod Jt'a'l,,tfto,d;tTSm:oT^^^^ ^.T"''-^ - ^ ™-'. is substantive gover„i„/tl e casrof t L '''iV*''f' ^' ''^" in^leclinable exists only in tlie nomin tive nnd . T^ *° )^'"''"'^ '* "^^longs. It supplied by the Gerir wWch is 1 kPw-*'^'- *''1 '''^''' ^-^ses being nominative «„,«,•., to hve or ovin -.''""'■''•'' '"'^^t'-^^^ive : a1 Jlative «,««,, differs from ;s verb. e nature of a but ill their rticipies, one nil", loving ; fticiples, the nd amandus. ribing an in- fect tenses. The three e be called i the future ime, or one am ■writing ghtning. 3t time : as e time : as 4. The Perfect expresses an action as completed in present time • aa scrips^ epidolam, I have written the 1 iter. ^ ' *' 5. Ihe Pluperfect describes an action as completed in nast Hm« . „« epMnn sn-ipseram, I ha.l written th^Ker. ^ ™' ' "' nujst have both Lingular ami 1VS°^' ' " "'""' s^g-ortJrSr=5-^ a.a,, so that ^or^^J^i^^^^-^l^^ ^^ l^^:^^ ^^ ^^ know iSTtem '"T^^l %?t ^* ^^ necessary, as in declension, to Know us stem. As in reality there are onlv two declensions viJ^ the vowel and the consonant declension -so theraSreallTonW twn conjugations, the vowel and the consonant conjiigat'o.r ^ ^ ^^ li"S 58 '■n Hi '•It I'ATIN GRAMMAR. •l.fler con,si,l«rably from hat of thl P''/""* '^"^ ^"I»n« «ften ^■""^^i^^r..,,U^^^^^^ .ntinitwe: as in from the pret°,t'S''?„T:rtl^\':'"'"^''^*°'^ ''^^*>- -« f-me.l aotu.n are formed from he pe,f ot t- m Thfr.^'"^*'' " ^"'"P'^t^d the passive voice are made un of nVrfU?"i V ^•''"^'' ^^"^ ''^' t«"se3 in and the auxiliary verK'.^ Participles derived from the supine a vS^cali'Sr;t: 'SrgateraSd%et ^"' *^^^."l-« --^-wn. saying, you must know tlif thr^e steml nf A "° Practical advantage ii S;,^-. Whatever may he S^S ^scS^ff-^i^^Si^ Bani^i?i\J;\K:;Le*rSrorof^';^ -^'^^ to be the same in all the tenses and moocL of 1 1 "^^ ''"""' ^"'^ ^g''''" tl^e ^ng table exhibits them in The active LnHf'''' ''''"'' ^^' MVoyr. singular and the plural •- ^"^"^ *^® passive, in both the 1. 2. 3. ACTIVE VOICE, Singular. pi^ral. leva, m, Qmug or imus 1 ers. IS (isti), itis (istis). 1 ers. it, unt (ont) PASSIVE VOICE. Singular, 1. Pers. r, 2. Pers. eris, 3. Pers. itur, Plural, Imur. Imini. untur. i^ S^-Z: JiS^lf t^;^^^jr^f *^e first person. future of the first and secon comWion o "'^ """^T^ ''' '^l"" »« tlie 's;^'':!i^r^ ""^f"'^ andr,a:*s;" """' '''''' ^-^^O' -«^-; is nl.so;bed by 'the' Vn'a vowe! ^f le'sV""''""^ ""'' *''-^' P-^o^^ lingular «"'{^^• «,.,«vrm5, «,„,a•fm^ &c. The ;^^^^^ and auclt for a«r/,7, . ^„"J'E 3.-Tlie personal -suffix /,«»nf^f) If x'°"^ '''^''' ''^^ instead of w in tlie words s,m, rohaZ^ Z um„l ''^ P^'"'"" P'"''''^! ««'! occur; conjugation it is unis: as3« f S^i J In'^'' '" ^^'' ^°»«''»""t te_ first vowel V or u is absorbed bv the firS "T^^ conjugations t -'-" pre";ic!iv^s^r:i:Lf \f.fi:r,;rr^^^^ p'^-^ ^-- the ^rst amaiti., ^MeUis, aJahaif^^lmaVS' itltT't^'^f-' "'^^^■erati, for Notk ^'-Tf' '^''"^'■'•'"■«' dekvisfil ' P"'^""* indicative alone haa pluraftlostiLTe'i'fisprec^edeVhv ^''''T^ ^"'^^ "^ *he third person ^ation .he personal suiiixes are preservedentire. ^'"nsonant conju- iM'f THE VERn IN GENERAL. 69 seems to bo some anJIent parted .i!:r:X^;l!S;^:t.i^ "^ll'^ji.'"*,,! auxiliary was either added or umlerstoo.l ), lo ^^tnul ^oim suffix 18 almost invariably absorbed by the final vowel of the strm. § 76. Besides the personal suffixes, which are the remain., nf =teTr^airor-iS;:s^-^-'^.-=^ amarem delebam, dekrJu ; but 4/'/;ro», m," i and VJS '' ' Th. i«T7»- !"««« tl'« .'' m the sub uncti^e aLlirem ^^r a »S •« " Ihe perfect of verbs with vowel stems generally ends in r/ W i's the perfect stem ends in .) ; but the majority .,f the verL lelcmdn^ the^w"i!f.f'",'''^ conjugations generally ends in turn, from which acti?. n P^:*"='P^^ P'-^f ^^'^ '" '«■'. '«. '«'«, and the future partT,- pie reneVaily enrinT"' ""'"" '"^ '"'•™^'^- '^'^^ ^P"- Btem\here£ a «««„,, ajnaMum; ,/ekns, delendam ; but .cv^-.l seW/i" ^ audiens, audiendum. A more ancient form for endum kund^Z ' I CHAPTER XVII. THE VERB esse, TO BE. .,^7"^-. '^^f ^*^"^ °{ *^e verb esse is es, so that sum. s»jmv, ^n^rii, Sim, 6ic., stand for esnm, esumus, esunt, esim, &c. "ita conjugation is defective, as it possesses only the imperfect 60 lljjjl LATIN ORAM.MAR. changed into ., .. era.n and e,X 1,:,:,' .^ '''" " '' S^n. Present ^cati.e. I>^,, Present Infinitne. ^^^- ^ui. Esse. Indicative. a„„ Subjunctive. Present. Sing. Sum, I am. Es, thou art. Es-t, lie (she or it) is. Plur. S-umiis, we are. Es-tis, you are. S-unt, tliey are. I Sim, I am, or may be. S-lS, tliou art, or may.st be. o-lt, Jie iH, or may be. S-Imus, wo are, or may be. I b-ltis, you are, or may be. »-int, they are, or may be. Sing Er-am, I was. Er-as, thou wert. Imprrfect. Es-sem I was, might, or should be. Esses, thou wert, mightst, or P« s+ 1 / , . . I «ii<)uldst be. Er-at, he (she or It) was. ; Es-set, he was, &c. Plur. Er-amils, we were. Er-atis, you were. Er-ant, tl ey were. I Es-semus, we were, dkc. I Es-setls, you were, (fee. Es-sent, they were, &c Sing. Er-o, I shall be. Er-Is, thou wilt be. Er-It, he will be. Plur. Er-imus, we shall be. Er-itis, you will be. Er-unt, they will be. Future. I^one. THE VERB esse, TO BE. gj Indicative. Subjunctive. Perfect. Sing. Pu-i, I was, or have Tu grim, I have been, or may ™ .^: l''"'« been. Fu-isti thou wert, or rL-eria. thou haat boen, or ^"^«* ^'^6"- n* vyst ^ ,,ve been. Fu-It, he was, or has been. Plur. Fu-Imfis, we were, or li.'ive been. Fu-istis, you were, or have been. Fu-erunt,orfuere,they were, or have been. .''u « rit, h( has been, tkc. Fu-erimus, we have been, "'.^'l>t or .should have been. Fu-eras, thou hadst Fu-isses, thou hadst been, or been. Fu-erat, lie had been. thou mightst or wouhlst have been. Fu-isset, he had been, &c. ^^"'" Fulrlrrf ''''?'?;"'"• i S^-i«S^^^«S, we had been, i^c. Pn1r«il 'r^M^''^- F«-i8SetlS, you had been &c. Fu-erant,theyhadl.een. Fu-issent, they had been &c i»] Future Perfect. Sing. Fu-gro, I shall have been. Fu-eris, thou wilt have been. Fu-grit, 1 been. ic wiii aave None, I 62 It") ■ ^-i ' M^i LATIN GRAMMAR. 1 Indicative. Future Perfect. Plnr. Fu-grimus, we shall have been, Fu-eritis, you will have ^^ been. -None. Fu-erint, they will have been. Subjunctive. Present. Sing. Es, be thou. Plur. Es-te, be ye. Imperative. Future. Es-to, thou sJialt be. Es-to, he shall be. Es-tote, you shall be. S-unto, they shall be. Infinitive. Present Infinitive, Esse, to be. perfect Infi^iitiye, Fu-isse, to have been ^:Ct^Tt:^^^' ^'■*^^""^' -' -' -e, or fare, to be Participles. -A'e^e??^, does not exist. Future, Fu-tiini'' ■« t» be, or is about am before or at tlie 1 ead '.v.. f^'""'"'* °'' '" the way pmesum T No' early what obsoh esunt] No- anoth esseni, are fn Instea fuvim §78. Stem. Ama. Sing. Plur. Sing. THE VERB esse, TO BE. 63 » ■ §78. Stem, Ama. CHAPTER XVIII. FIRST OR a CONJUGATION. Active Voice. Present. Am6. Indicative. Perfect. Ama-vi. Supine. Ama-tum. Infinitive. Ama-re. Present. Subjunctive. Smg. Am6, I love. Ama-s, thou lovest. Ama-t, he loves. Plur. Ama-mus, we love. Ama-tis, you love, Ama-nt, they love. Am-em, I love, or may love. Ames, thou lovest, or mayst love. Am-et, he loves, or may love. Am-emiis, welove,ormay love. Am-etis, you love, ormay love. Am-ent, they love, ormay love. Sing. Ama-bam, I was loving or I loved Imperfect. Ama-rem, I loved, might, or should love. . _ oiiuuiu lUVO. Ama-bas, thou wert Ama-res, thou lovedest, loving or lovedst. .liina bat, he woa loving or loved. miglitst, or shouldst love. Ama-ret, he loved, might, or should love. n^':^ 64 h!|/|' mmv i ill WW 1 1 ' 'Ml .1; m Indicative. LATIN GRAMMAR. Imperfect. Subjunctive. Plur. Ama-bamtis, we were I Am 5 r5t««„ Aprils- ^' '-'' y'^'^^'C"'''' "'«■-'• Ama-bant, they were Amkrrt ^ "i loving „. ,ov/d. I ^rruVloTe!"""' "''^"'' Sing. Aiua-bo, I shall love. Ama-bis, thou wilt love. Ama-bit, he will love. Plur. Ama-bimus, we shall I ,, love. I -None. Ama-bitis, you will love. Ama-bunt, they wiJl love. Perfect. ha. lo;ed ' "'■ Ama-V«rlt he has loved, &c. Ph.r. Ama^j^^tls,^., >-^. I AmS-vM.fi, .e have Wed, ^r ,:ife'?;v^T '°™'' ^t-"™». ^°" <>- loved, or have loved. Ama-verunt or ama- yere, they loved, or nave loved. Ama-verint, they have loved. Ph Sing. FIRST OR a COXJUGATION 65 !TIVE. loved, might, loved, might, loved, might, e loved, or last loved, ved. loved, &c. ave loved, ive loved, tve loved. Indicative. Subjunctive. Phiperfe'-t. Sing. Ama-vgram, I had Ama-vissem, I had, might, or loved. Ama-veras, thou hadst loved. sliould have loved. Ama-visses, thou hadst, liiiglitst, or shouldst have I loved, Ama-verat, he had j Ama-visset, he had. &c loved. I Pl.ir. Ama-vgramus, we had , Ama-vissemus, we had, &c loved, I Ama-veratis, you had Aira-vissetis, you had, &c. loved. i Ama-verant, they had j Ama-vissent, they had, &c. loved. i Future Perfect. Wing. Ama-vero, 1 shall have loved. Ama-veris, thou wilt have lo\ed. Ama-verit, he will have loved. Plur, Ama-verimus, we shall have loved. Ama-veritis, you will have loved. Ama-verint, they will have loved, None. Present. Sing. Ama, love thou. Plur. Ama-tg, love ye. Imperative. Future. Ama-to, thou shalt love. Ama-t6, he shall love. Ama-tote, ye shall love. Ama-nto, they shall love. V ■ H '■5; ■^ :'llil 66 f LATIN GRAMMAR. Infinitive. P^resent, Ama-rg, to love. perfect, Ama-visse, to have loved. ^^uture, Ama-turum (am, um) esse, to be about to love. Gerund. Gen. Ama-ndi, of loving -Dat. Ama-ndo, to loving Ace. Ama-ndum, loving Abl. Ama-ndo, with or by loving. 1 Supine. ..ma-tum, (i„ „..dor) t„ i„ve ; and amS-ta, to be Wed. Participles. Presenf., Ama-ns, Joviii.. Future, Ama-turiis, a, um, being about to ^e. 4 ;l i I Indicative. Passive Voice. Present. Subjunctive. Si-g. A«>gr, I „„, loved. {Am-eria™,oved,o,„.a,Ke Ama^so^Mhouart Am°^S«o...™.,,e,.,,o„,rt A»:a.tur, he i. loved. ! A^^attTe^^C " T' Pl'ir, Ama-mur, weare loved Aina-mini, you are loved. Am-emiir, we are lovc : ^c Am-emlni, you are ..ved, 'J m- §m 70 'li" 111' il|!^ Indicative. ^ATIN (JRAMMAR. Present. Subjunctive. Pl..r.Mone-m„s.weadv;,. , Mone-amus, we advfse, „ MOne-nt, ttey advise. U„ta^t, they adv^e, o. ! may advise. Imperfect «inff. Mone-bam, I was ad- Mone-rem T . 7 • ^ visiiiy. *w"erem, 1 advised, or a& "'"■ ™' .Mono-res, thou advised,*, o,. Mone-batrhe was ad- Mo",;^*-? "','™'- , ■ vising i "™.« ret, Jje advised, or *' I miglit advise. ''""■■ "Sr^' "^ -relMone-remu,, we advised, „r Monp h5f?o i ""^lit advise. adtisf^'- ^°" "-iMona-reti,, y„„ „dvi.sed, „r Mone-ban^ +1,^ ' „ "^^^"* advise. adviS' "^ ""•" ^""^r'; *^y advised, o.. *» might advise. Sing. M6ne-bo, I shall advise Mone-bis, thou wilt advise. Mone-bit, he wiil ad- vise. Plur. Mone-bimus, we shall advise. Mone-bitis, you wiU advise. Mone-bunt, they will advise. Future. Nona SECOND OR e CONJUOATION. 71 Indicative. Subjunctive Perfect. Sing. M6n-ui, I advised, or , M6n-u6rim, I may have have advised. i advise.::; 72 LATIN GRAMMAR. Indicative. Future Perfect. Plur. Mon-iierimus, wo shall have advised. I MoQ-ueritis, you will ' .^ have atlvised. i ^oae. Mon-uerint, they will have advised. ! Subjunctive. 11'- •■^1 Imperative. ^^^^■^^^- Future. Mng. M6ne, advise^thou. Mone-to, thou, or he shall Plui\ M5ne-t6 advise you. aih £.se. Mone-tote. you shall advise. Mone-nto, they shall advise. Infinitive. . * Present, M6ne-re, to advise. Perfect, M6n-uisse, to hav_, advised. Future, Moni-turum (am, um) ess. . to be about to advise. GrERUND. Gen. Mone-ndi, of advising. Dat. Mon. -iidii, to, or for ad vising. Ace. M6ne-udum, advising Abl. Mone-ndo, by, or in .-I.xoing. SUPIN . Acc. MSni-tum, in u er t. advise. Abl. Moni-ta, to be advised. Participles. Present, Monp-ns. advisino-. Future, Moiil-tiirus, about to advise. SECOND OR e CONJUGATION. 73 Passive Voice Indicative. Sudjunotive. Present. Sing. M6ne-or, I am advised. MSne-ar, I am, or may be ! advised. Mone-ris or re, thou i Mone-aris or are, thou art, or art advised. ! mayst be advised. Mone-tur,he is advised, i Mo j atur, lie is, or may be advised. Plur. Mone-mur, we are ad- \ Mone-amur, we are, or may ^is«'I-^ , be advised. Mone-mini, yoti are ! Mone-amini, you nro, or may »'lvis.'d. l.e advised. Mone-ntur, Ihey are \ Mone-antur, they are, or may advised. be advised. Imperfect. Sin^. T'5ne-bar, I was being! Mone-rer, I might be advised. udvif 1. ! Mone ' is or bare, i Mone-reris nr rere, thou thou ist being ad- | mightst be advised, vi.^ed. I Mone-batur, he was ! Mone-retur, he niit^ht be being advised. I advised. Plur. Mone-bamur, we were i Mone-remur, we might e being advised. | advised. Mone-bamlni, you were , Mone-remini, you might be being n i vised. I advisod. Mone-bantur, they woi-e | Mone-rentur, tliey might be being advised. | advised. Future. ••^ing. Mone-bor, T shall be advised. Mone-beris or here, yr thou wilt be advised, ^'^^^' Mone-bitur, he will be advised ■h.'iX '•a 74 LATIN GRAMMAR. Indicative. Future. Plur. Mone-blmur, we shall , 1)0 advised. I Mone-bimini, you will .. bo advised. ^oxiQ. Monebuntur, they will be advised. Subjunctive. W" PcrffXt. Sing. M6Bi-t„s (a urn) sum. Moaltus (a, um) sim T '.h-iSi."'' '"'™ '"""■ I "»'' ''»- i^-n";ivS be°nX«e,I "' ^ -.v«t have bee,, ,„lvi.„.d. i Monl-ti (ae, a) estis, Moni-ti (ae, a) aitis vo„ Monl-ti (ae, a) sunt, [ Moni-ti (ae, a) sint thev Phiperfect. Sing. M5nl-tas (a, um) eram, Monl-tus (a, um) essem I vised. I ""o'^^st Have been advised. Moni-tus (a, um) erat, Moni-tus fa, nrr «sset he - naa been advised. nu^ht hav^ be^u. advfsed SECOND OH e CONJUQATIOS. 76 Indicative. Subjunctive. I^luper/ecf.. Plur. Moniti (ae,a)eramus, Moni-ti (ae, a) essemus, we Mo^ T/ r;;;'''':^^- ^ „'"i^''fc'"'ve been advised. Moni-ti (ae, a) eratis, Moni-ti (ae, a) essetis, you }ou hud been ad-; might have been advised. VI.SIU. I Moni-ti (ae, a) erant, Moni-ti (ae, a) essent, they vS migl't have been advised. Future IW/ect. Sing. M6ni-tu8 (a, urn) ero, I shall have been ad- vised. Moni-tus (a, um) eris, thou wilt have been advised. Moni-tus (a, um) erit, be will have been advised. T>i »*• • X. / None. I liir. Moni-ti (ae, a) erimus, we shall have been j advised. I Moni-ti (ae, a) eritis, you will have been advised. Moni-ti (ae, a) erunt, they will have been advised. Present. iMi'EKATnE. Sing. M6ne-re, be thou ad- vised. Plur. Mone-mini, be ye ad- vised. Ftdure. Mone-tor, thou, or he shall be advised. Mone-bimini, you shall be advised. Mone-ntor, they shall be advised. '4 fi-.i 'I. I 76 LATIN GRAMMAR. Infinitive, Present, Mone-ri, to be advised. Perfect, M6ni-tum (am, urn) esse, to have been advised. I'uture, Monl-tum iri, to be about to be advised. Participles. Perfect, Moni-tus, a, um, advised. Gerundive, Mone-ndus, a, um, Reserving or requiring to be advised. Ku I -* §80. THIRD OR CONSONANT CONJUGATION. Active Voice. Stem. Present. Perfect. Supine. hifinitive. Scrib. Scrib-6. Scrip-si.* Scrip-tum.* Scrib-ere. Indicative. Sing. Scrib-o, I write. Present. Subjunctive Scrib-is, thou writest. Scrib-it, lie writes. Scrib-am, I write, or may write. Scrib-as, thou writest, or rtiayst write. Scrib-at, he writes, &c. Plur. Scrib-imiis, we write, i Scrib-amiis, we write, (fee. Scnb-itis, you write. ; Scrib-atls, you write, etc. Scnb-unt, tliey write. - Scrib-ant, they write, &c. Imperfect. Sing. Scrib-ebam, I wrote, or was writing. Scrib-efcas, tliou wrot- est, or wast writing. Scrib-ebat, he wi-ote, Scrib-erem, I wrote, might, or slioukl write. Scrib-eres, thou wrotest, niiglitst, or shouldst write. Scrib-eret, he wrote, tfec. • As to the change of the b hito y in these forms, see §ya. THIRD OR CONSONANT CONJUGATION. 77 INDICATIVE. Subjunctive. Imperfect. Plur. Scrib-ehamus, we | Scrib-gremus, we wrote, ikc wrote, &c. Scrib-ebatis you wrote, ifcc. Scrib-ebant, they wrote, &c. Scrib-eretis, you wrote, (fee. Scrib-erent, they wrote, &c. Sing. Scrib-am, I shall write. Scribes, thou wilt, &c. Scrib-et, he will, Ac. Plur. Scrib-emus,weshal],&c. Scrib-etis, you will, Ac. Scrib-ent, they will, ifec. Future. None. Perfect. Sing. Scrip-si, I wrote, o ■ Scrip-serim, I have, or mav ha\e written. | have written. Scrip-sisti, thou wro!-- Scrip-seris, thou hast, oi- est, or hast written. niayst ]iji\e writteii, Scrip-sit, he wrote, .fce. Scrip-serit, Le ha.s, cVc. Plur. Scrip-simus, we wjote, Scrip-serimus, wo lia\e, ,^r.. Scrip-sistis, you wrote, Scrip-serltis, you have, &.•. Ac. I Scrip-serunt or sere, Scrip-serint, they have, Ac they wrote, &c. PUipt^rfect. Sing. Scrip-seram, I had Scrip-sissein, I had, might, or written. j should !ia\e wi'itten. Scrip-seras, thoii hadst, Scrip-sisses, tLou hadst. ^^' roightst, or wouldst have Avritten. Scrip-s6rat, he had, Ac, ' Scrip-sisset, he had, Ac. '■-ir. < • ■ h' i '■ ^X- , i*! , 1 1 1 (' ■ II is ■ I rii 78 LATIN GRAMMAR. Indicative. Subjunctive. Phi^perfect. Plur. Sc^p-ssramas, we had, ^ Scrip-sisstoas, we lad. &. Scrip-seratis, you had, \ Scrip dssetls, yo,, had, i-e. Senp-stont, they had, : Scrip-sissent. they had, io. m't M W::% M: Future Perfect. Sing. Scrip-sero, I shall have I written, &c. Scrip-seris, thou Avilt have written. Scrip-serit, he will have written. Plur. Scrip-serimus, we shall I have, etc. Scrip-seiitis, you will have, itc. Scrip-serint, they wDl have, ttc. i Present Imperative. Future. Sing. Sorib-e, write th„„. , s,nMto, thou shalt write I Scrib-ito, he shall write. Piur. ScriMW, write ye. I ScriHtote. you .shall write. I bcnb-unto, they shall write. Infinitive. Preseyit, Scrib-6re, to write ^ei/e-ct, Scrip-sisse, to have written. /'u^Mre,Scrip-tiirum /am. nm^ «=c. f« v . . . . — u, ^.„.^.^,^ Tu bu aoout to wfite, third or consonant conjugation. Gerund. Gen. Scrib-endi, of writing. Dat. Scrib-endo, to writing. Ace. Scrib-endum, writing, Ab]. Schb-enda, bv or in writinsr. Supine. Scrip-tum, (in order) to write ; Scrip-tu, to be written. Participle,s. Pnsent, Scrib-ens, writing. Future, Scrip-ttirus, about to write. 79 Passive Voice. Indicative, Suhjunctivb. Present. Sing, Scrib-or, 1 am, or am : Scrib-ar, I ara, or may be being written. written. Scrib-eiis or re, tliou ' Scrib-aris or are, tliou art, art, or art being or mayst be written, written. j Scrib-itiir, be is, &c, \ Scrib-atiir,heis,or maybe,(tc. Plur. Scrib-imiir, we are, kc. Scrib amiir, we are, &c. Scrib-imini, you are &c. | Scrib-amiiii, you are, &.c. Scrib-untur, tliey are, ' Scrib-antur, they, are, &c. Imperfect. Sing. Scrib-ebar, I was, or } Scrib-erer, I was written, wa.s being written. , Diigbt, or slioukl be writ- ! ten. Scribebaris or bare. I Scrib-ereris or rere. Scrib-ebatiir. I Scrib-eretiir. Plur. Scrib-ebamiir. Scrib ebamlni. Scrib-ebantur. ! Scrib dremiir. Scrib-6remini. Scrib-erentur. ;S <.■/•■■ 1-, V, 80 !■: 1 l^ATIN GRAMMA K, Indicative. ■Future. Sing. Scrib-ar, I shall be i written. ] Scrib-eris or erg. j Scrib-etur. ' N"one. Plur. Scrib-emur. Scrib-eminl. Scrib-entiir. Subjunctive. Sing. ■Perfect wiitt™ ""nay have be<..i written. Sorts {a"; u"S)' St KSt"^ J^' """ ^'^- f va. um; est. ourip-tus (a, urn) sit. PI iir. '•^i'lg. Scrip-tus (a, um) er^ I shaJ I liave been written ( Scrip-tus (a, um) eris. I ^°^e. Scrip-tus (a, um) erit. third ob consonant conjugation. Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect. Plur. Scrip-ti (ae, a) erimus. Scrip-ti (ae, a) eritis. None. Scrip-ti (ae, \) erunt. 81 Vrenent. Sing. Scrib-ere, be written. Imperative. Future. thou I Scrib-ltor, tlmu shalt be I writfeii. i Scrib-ltor, he shall be writ- ten. Plur. Scrib-imini, w lit ten. be ye , Scrib-e-mini, ye shall be written. . Scrib-u-ntor, they .shall be wi-itten. Infinitive. Present, Scrib-i, to be -written. Perfect, Scrip-tum (am, urn) esse, to have been written. Future, Scrip-turn iri, to be about to be written. Participles. Perfect, Scrip-tus, a, um, written. Gtrundlve, Scrib-endas, a, um, requiring, or deservino- to be written. •' »■ ^••f ^ f . U l f ■ 5;, 81. Stem. Audi. FOURTH OR i CONJUGATION. Active Voice. Pr >ie,tt. Perfe-t. Supine. Audi-6. Auci-vi. Audi-turn. Tnf/aitivs. Audi-rd. 83 LATIN GRAMAfAR. Sing. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Audi-6, I hear, or am ; Audi-am, I hear, or may hearing. | hear. Audi-s. j Audi-as. -A-udi-t. 1 Audi-at. Piur. Audi-mus. Audi-tis. Audi-unt. Audi-amiis. Audi-atis. Audi-ant. Siiioj. Imperfect. Audi-ebam, T he.ud, Audi-rem, I heard, or should Pliir. or was liearing. Audi-ebas. Audi-ebat. Audi ebamiis. Audiebatis. Audi-ebant. Iiear. Audi-res. Audi-ret. Audi-remiis. Audi-retJs. Audi-rent. Sing. Plur, Audi-am, I shall hear. Audi-es. Audi-et. Audi-emiis. Audi-etis. Audi-ent. Future. None. Sing. Perfect. Audi vi, I heard, or Audl-verim, I have, or may have heard. \ have heard. Audi-visti. '■ Audi-veris. Audi-vit. Audi-verit. Piur. Audi-vimus. Audi-vistis. Audi-verunt, or verg. Audi-verimus. Audi-yeiitTa. Audi-verint. fourth or i conjugation. Indicative. 83 Sing. Audi-vSram, ]l('iU' t^ -t^ •»-> •>-> p i b ^^ h »^ b « PL, p^ a< a< 04 ii-i ps CO £S M o ^ ••g 03 P Ti T< 'o3 C8 o3 ^ P< A Pi rn OS is to O ."^ u . •■-< !■ CO a p . -Sh 1. 08 P P oxuS-ojg-jgPh +:» ^ :::^^ ^ cp "« cp « 'p p P p ip ip •5- CO p p >- CO Ip H >-l ^, 0) > > > G M 03 f^ >iH >H >-l >H O) (U O) > > > a o CO CO M H M rO ^ +J +3 jj 1^ 1^ ic3 led icd -«-> ■I-' -«-> S P »H »H 1— t ^ ^-1 ^ *-« H 55 ""■"^ 000 QQ ® MM MMM W f porfect, ture, rfect, 3 1^ P4 s CO P « w p P , a> P P _j s g s 2 g s www w ■4i3 O m aj AhmPh ■8 p^ ( i ^ .o^^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) 1.0 I.I I !f IIM I lis illM 11:25 lllll 1.4 18 1.6 7 ^ /. y. ^ ^ rnUiugi u|jiuu Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 iV iV ■O^ '^'^^V^ ^^^f^ \ '^\'^'- ^ ^^■■t % O^ 68 LATIN GUAMMAR. o 03 03 a t ( ee c<3 ca P4 4 3 a 03 ■4^ ft 03 fS ea «« o3 CO w • - !=*£ 03 CO (^ 'd a PJ cJ a I I I I TJ '"H '■-« •!-< ■4-2 -,-J -,-i -t-< 53 H >H ?-» ra ca o3 c3 &. ft, p^ PI, Ml 4 . nil ;:! a"^ -ts « , »4 >"U )4) o ^ M ■^ ICL> '« »H u O) 03 > > •5* >H ■♦J *** icij ie8 o o WW ^--s a> ca o CJ 03 s s <« ^ « s:^ 03 > > i> CO IPS a CO ( >3 . iri !r ft '^ > ic4 e a 3 o a ■rJ a 03 +!. S3 o a a 03 »:. 0) a" o w a 03 CO 3 - 3 T3 S t:^ " 3 3 03 S 3 3 3 CO 3 03 .J a. a § ^ g 3^ 3 ca CO - . 3 2 • CD (H !=> S 3 3-2 bi ^ >- ^t 03 03 03 03 > > > > ri § a V^ca-- c3 of ., . 3 « rX 2 '^ f^ 2 rs 3t=) ^•^-^ f? c8 103 ica c8 -*-> -M -^ ^ :*■• el P w 3 Co ?> M « 3 op t-i -u 1=5 « li S oj 03 J; S OJ fcH -t-" J< >-l 0) 3 OJ g s g S* ^ s* ea 03 e3~ to ^ ^ C< n m C XJ a 3 1=1 O) -f-> -M (U s 3 ^ _f- ^ w . w w pj ? S a « 3 P 3 a> i 2 '^^ 13 3 3 3 3 3 . 3 2 ra (^ 3 3 '■a !=) ^ s a 3 " .. C3 S3 oiT ^ ^ 3 M w C 3 3 3 7=1 ♦f^ 3 4; 3^ S c: S S 3 u a oj CONTUACTED AND ARCHAIC VERBAL FORMS. 83 CHAPTER XX. CONTRACTED AND ARCHAIC VERBAL FORMS. .Jin^' ^'^ .*^%P<^''f«<'t V^.tbe first and second conjugations when ending mav» and e^*, and in the forms derived from it, where the 18 fol owed by . or r the v is frequently thrown out, arTd the two vowels are contracted into one. In the^.erfect of the four h c'r gation end.ng m Ivi the .• may always l/e thrown out ; but a co - ti^ction of the two vowels takes place only when theHsfolWd thrown out r-^""'"" P"'^'"' indicative the v is never ^tS:;Ji;i^T singular-^,.a.«.i, amasti ; delcvisti, delesti ; Perfect, 2nd person ^IxxroX—Amavktis, amastis ; dehvistis, delestis ■ iiiutivintiti, (imusttH. Perfect, 3rd person plural- J, nai-erMft^ amarunt ,• ddevtrunt, ,/efe- ^ runt ; audifcrunt, audienint. Subjunctive, 1st person— ^wwrer™, mmrim; deleverim, deltrhn • Infinitive— ^7«at)me, amasse ; delevisse, delesse ; mtdivme, audiisse or ajtuisse. Pluperfect indicative-^ ma i'gm7», amdram ; delevSram, ddenim • Pluperfect subjunctive- J wawsem, ama&mn ; delevlsfiem, dele.i- seni ; audivissem, audissem. NOTK l.-The V is but rarely dropped in the first j.erson sinuular as e.ff., m petn for pdin; desC for dmci ; but it is nearly always the cu^e in the con.pounds of eo, I go: as abeo, perfect ohii ; Lko, iKrfect m?/ jver.0, perfect. p.r. Their infinitive an.l pluperfect subjuncK there fo e may endm ,m-c, KA'Sfw, orm'Pandmm. ive tutreioie Note 2. -The verb vovi (I know) frequently dropj the v, and a.lmits of contraction : as novisti iiosti ; mristis, nostis f mrM, v5r>nd Sww iwnm ; vovi^sc, nosse, &c. But m7,y; for novm> .lo.s not occur ' ' INOTE3.--In some forms, generally poetical, /« is thrown out : m dixK Srrr^d the like." ''"•"*■"'■ ^~ ''' *^""^"'^^'- ^""--^ f-- «"'- •^"V''.'*',r-^"?'"^"" '^'f t^e ending e»-«n« in the third person plural of the perfect indicative, we frequently find ere: as aniavere, dektl-e^artdivZ Z'Zl' ^°' «'««/«'-««^ delcverunl, audiverunt, scHpserunt /hut I'ver amare for amarunt. > t- , ^^k utver Note 5. -Instead of the ending ris in the second per&^n sintrular of tl.n p.a.«sive we frequently find re; as delebare. aniarSre, CZS for £ Note 6. -The imperatives of the verb dic^re, ducgre. facire and ferrp are dw, due, fae, fcr. The compounds of /ero also have/V? • as Xf 2 »* ■..'•I'i, .» > 11 l.i' V^^\ h 'i\ s I: \i IV, ;■ f: «'^iy r ■' El 90 LATIN GRAMMAR. fer; whereas those of dico and facto always have the final e • m ^dfr^ l^ce>ca!eface. Those of dnce.-e may have Uer due or dice, L .iSd Note 7. -Verbs of the third and fourth conjugations sometimes suh.fi tute the more anc ent « for e in the ending of the gei3Tnd gerandive • varkblv wifh +{"'''""f"'\^'' r*'^'"^"*' /«"'^«'^«^ Thi« L thecaseTn: variably with the verb eo (I go), as eundum est. In certain legal Xases dain^if'ln *" "f"' '' t^'y""^' '''"^•- ^'resrepetundae,thhif,trbel7. claimed in case of a man being guilty of extortion. j^OTK 8.— Poets sometimes form tue future active of the fonrth mni,, gorfuture" r ^'^^ ""' ""' ^^ ^"■^''' --'■^''' - - alw^Vs tle'^case'irrJa Note 9 -Sometimes we find the present subjunctive endinjrin ,-»,•«<. Mini for ?da«, effodint for ./ot/(a«< / so also diim for Z^ /e^lZ' for fpnnn 1 ^^'1"^!'*^^ ««^'f ^or "'"/^■«'«. Similar forms in the firsf and Note 11. -In eariy Latin the ending of the present infinitive nas.ivp was z«. instead of ..- as laudarier, aAutier, ller, ioxS^i^Suu, ,,1 'lilt CHAPTER XXI. FORMATION OP THE PRESENT, PERFECT, AND SUPINE FROM THE STEM. modlfd in'tlf "preint-'^ ""^ ""^' " Btrengthened'or otherwise 1. By doubling its final l,r and t, as : pelh, curro, mitto, from the .^.enis pe cur, mj/. This is the case especially when the stem ends in the liquids I or r. i j ^^ "ue seem 2. By adding a strengthening il- ia.) To stems-ending in a vowel, as in sino, lino, from the stems at tiiid f.i, ^^■^ '^''and')",« "^'^^ ^""^^ "" ""' ""' *^= '''■'"'' ^'"'"^' ^^°" «** ^'•^ '^^.iT'v^'-"'^ a final mute, as: vivco, frango, fundo. trom <-c,jrag fun. Tn riiw;w and cumbo the w repre- Bents 71 ; the stems are rup and cu6. ^Most verbs of the second conjugation drop the final S of the FORMATION OF PRESENT, PERFECT, AND SUPINK. 91 3. By adding a strengthening t, as .- Jlecfo, pWfo, ivomjloc vlec Zfac, iTmc '"'' ^'■'■^"^■'"'•' """"■^^'"•' ^'•«'" the kems '^' ^^eS'?:.' '""' "' "' ^'■•^"^ <^'"- ^'■^"^")' -■^'°' fr««» the stems 6. By the addition of u, as tinguo, from #/«y. 8 M.ni^ fddition of i, as : ca;>;o, facio, from ca;, and/«c at f fl 1 "i'^''^ [?"y "'"^ i" ^ consonant form the present ::i: fro^JKd ir ^ °' *'^ ^^^^^ ^^-j-^^*--- -- ^^^-: Note. —I ftem. See 2 t;o"«onantal stems with a short radical vowel form the perfect in'\-^as'*'r^-!!?^ '*""' '^'*^. * ^°"g '•^'•i^^^ ^'«^<^1 n^ake the perfect l;..^ by position, as : carpo, carpd ; ping.., yi^on ; but vlnclZlll 'WeSrcUMdl '" "^ "''^^ ^'^ exception, forming the perfect in t, as: i:ii ||!/':l I K- 92 LATIN GRAMMAR. ,f'\ PH '1 § 86. 1, The su^me in the case of stems ending in a vowel is formed l.y simply adaing turn to the stem ; but most verbs of the second conjugation change the final g of tlie stem into f, as : ama-tum, Uele-ium, audi-tum, tnba-tum ; but mo]ieo (stem 7)ioni), mom-turn. Note.— Some verbs of the second conjugation throw out the final e of tne stem altogether, as : doceo, dvc-tvin; teveo, ten-turn. 2. Stems ending in a ;> {b, p) or k {c, g, qn) sound form the supine by adding turn, as ; cap-io, cap-tarn; scrib-o, scrip-turn; rep-o, ren- turn; faci-o, factum; dic-o, dic-tuvi. _ Note 1.— Exceptions are labor, lapsum ; and those in which the k sound in the present i.s strengtlioned by the adilition of t, as .• Hecto, flcxum ■ plcclo, plexum ; pccto, pcxum ; nccto, ne.vum. Further, some in wliicli the ^ sound is preceded by a liquid, as : men/o, mersuni; tergo, tcrsum ■ spargo, sparsum. Fim;oha,s,fictv.m, nndjigo, Hxum. Note 2. -In some cases the k sound (e,./.", qu) is dropped in the per- fect and supine before the initial t or s of the supine ending, as : fulc-io fut-si,Jul-tum ; torqu-eo, torsi, tortum ;.farcio, farsi, farium. 3. Stems ending in a t sound {d or () have sum in the supine, as • Sd-o, e-sum : Ifol-o, Ifi-sum ; drfoid-o, dejhi-sum. 4. Stems ending in a liquid (I, m, n, r) sometimes have turn and sometimes sum. The stems ending in m or n generally have turn, whih^ tiiose ending in I or r liave sum, e.r/., em-o, em-tum ; can-o, ran-tum ■ vr-rr-o, ver-sum ; fairo, fal-sum. Par-io, howaver, has par-turn, anil vian-eo, man-sum. Note.— The supine itself is not often used, but its e.xistence must often bo presupposed when the future participle active occurs, which is formed froi,i tae supine. But in some cases that participle is formed from the stem as i^ npjioars m the present tense, and not from the supine, as : snnarc, sonui soiutum, Imt sonatur us ; morior, mortuus, but morilurus, and some others! § 87. When the stems of the present, the perfect, and the supine are known, any verb may be conjugated without difficulty, as all the other forms are derived from them. ■^P^'^iT,^* "^^^ ^^ observed hero that as the personal endings are rem- nants of the personal pronouns, so the tense suffixes are remnants of the auxiliary verb esrc ; as in amav-i (fui), amav-Fram, amar-iisein Icssem) ■ but m ama-bo and arm-bam the bo and bam are of the same origin as the iiiighsh be (fuo, (pvw). CHAPTER XXTI. VERBS FOLLOWING DIFFERENT CONJUGATIONS IN DIFFERENT TENSES. § 88. A change in the conjugation of a verb is visible, for example, in crepo, vvliicb iu tlio imperfect tenses follows the the final e of VERBS FOLLOWING DIFFERENT CONJUGATIONS. 93 first conjugation with the stem crepa (crepas, crepat, crepa- bam, crepaho, crepam, 6:c.) ; but in tlie perfect and sui)ine {creput, crepUam) and the tenses derived from them it follows tho second. § 89. Such a change of conjugation is caused bv a vowel such as e, j, ov n, being added to the pure stem, or bv the stem receiving a strengthening increase in the present, llie tol lowing cases may be noticed :— '■ ^Tl?''T^^''''^li '^''"'' /""'"'"g ^^^'^ P^'-fe'=t and supine regu- larly follow the vowel conjugation in the imperfect tenses, as auneo, avxi, auc-tum, aw,5re ; saepio, saep-.i, ,suep-tum, «/'/)'?('; stintio, scn-si mi-svw, .entire; vincio, vinxi, vinc-tum, viiwirr ; vuleo, vid-i, visum, videre. \Zi,TTu '" f ""f^iuence of a strengthening increase of tlie Fnntnl V T ^''^ ^^'"^ Conjugation; but form the perfect and ■'''XPie ; crc-n-co, cre-vi, cre-titm,creiicSre. ^^"i»f .^'""sonantal stems form the imperfect tenses after the tUiKl ; but the perfect and supine after the second or fourth conjuu'atK.n as:Jremo (3), /m««i (2), frnnitum (2), franere (•') , /'fo {,i), petM'i (4), petUinn (4), pe(?rp (3). 4. borne vowel stems sometimes follow one and sometimes another ... re verbs dare an. sfnre in their perfects dedi and Jeti follow the third conjugation. exShAhe nfnnLlnl''^ '" *'"' and the prcccdins chapter is intended to to be called tZZT t5' f.?"" w, '^^""^^^ '^ ^'^'"g^ "^"'^"^^ °^ ^«rbs used ™ f !! f Ti ^" • , ^^']* *''""S^ *'^''y ^''^ "o* irregular in the ordinary e stutnt iTr^nf'^'^^t'' ^P ^""'l^''^' classified lists so as to enable carried out. ^ ''""^ *^^ principles above explained are .1. J 6 ( CHAPTER XXIII. LISTS OP VERBS FORMING THEIR PERFECTS AND SUPINES DIF- FERENTLY FROM THOSE GIVEN IN THE TABLES OP THE CONJUGATIONS. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. § 90. 1 Most verba of the first conjugation form their nerfepf fiupmfl and infinitive Ul-a nr>- i jj- s"""" '""" wieir perrecc, r^to thrsUm. KnfVi /u ''•^^' r'^'^'^Stheauirixes, vi, turn, and re to the stem ; but the foUowmg form the perfect in ui, and the (•■•■ill i » rli 94 LATIN GRAMMAR. if ': I.-; I supino in rhim, as if tliey belonged to tlie second conjugation, the final a of the stem being thrown out : — Cr^po (creak, make a noise), crY-pui, Cuho (lie down), ciihiii, Jldnio (tame), Odnmi, Sdno (sound), sdniii, Tfrnn (thunder), t5md, Viio (fwbid), viiiii, Mh-o (glitter, dart), nfcui, Frico (rub), /ricui, crPpUuni, cr^pdre. cfihilum, ciVulre. ddmUuni, ddimlre. uSiittum, sdiidre. (diiUinn, tSiidrc. vT:tUmn, rPtdre. — 1)1 hare, frle.tum or frhdre. frkdtwix, pUrJtum or pHcdre. pl'icdlum, sectuii), nUcdrp. PIko (fold), pUcui or plfca-vi, S^co (cut), s^cui. Note 1.— As a general rule compound verbs are conjugated like the fiiiiplo verbs from which tliey are formed. ]iut tliere are some txcejitions to^this rule, e.g., vr-co, I kill, ia conjugated like n)iin ; but the compouiid riieco has in the perfect cither en^cavi or eii^cui, and in the sujune either nih'atiini or enevtvm. The same is the case with some conijiounds of rri8jH0, as : dhrrepo (I differ), di8cr!>■ \il t 96 Mordeo (bito), Peiidco (liaiiL,'), Si)()tilf>o (promiac), ToiiUio (alioar), NoTK LATIN CUIAMMAR. Dii'iinorili, n/iifitefi. mMrCri. riri. CHAPTER XXV. VEHHS OP THE THIRD CONJUGATION. § 92. Tho aiiiJHivnt iire^^'ulai-itics of verbs of the third conjugation j;(!ii<'rally aiise out of the concurrence of the final conH(»nant of the ytein with the initial consonant of the sullix, which causes vaiiotis chan<,'<'S. Sometimes, also, a verl) in some of its tenses follows tlie second or fourth conjugation instead of the third, as : pHo (3), perfect pet'ivi (4), petUum (1), pcthu'. (.'}). We sliall classify the verbs according to the final con- Bonants of their stems. §93. 1. Verls xohose Ste^- ' "md in b oi' p. If the railical vowel of the verb is bhort, the perfect takes the Buffix !, but if long, st ; the supine alwajs ends in lum. Capio {cdp), I take, cepi, Ruwpo (rUp), I break, rup%. Eepo (creej)), repsi, Carpo (pluck). carpsi. Gluho (peel), glupxi, Nuho (marry), mi/m, Scnipo (flcrntoh), scalp.si, tScul/io (chisel), aculpni. Saibo (write) scripd, capfum, cdpire. r It plum, rumpere. reptum, reph-e. cnrptum, carpSre. gliiptum, glubSre. nil pi urn, nuliere. scatptum. scalpire. aculpiiim, aculpere. acripium. scrlbire. Note. - Exceptions arc : cRpo (I steal), clcpsi, but also clepi, deptum, el^phr ; and lambo (I lick). Iambi, lambitum, lambcre ; and bibo (I mink), bibi, bibiluiiu It must be noticed that 6 before s and t becomes j9. Pit i^H "'" %■ '^1 i ■ II ■ I 'm *::'i\ 98 LATIN GRAMMAR. m [I- '■ § 94. 2. Verbs whose Stems end in a Guttural, o, g, qu. They form the supine iu turn. 1. The perfect takea *, when the radical vowel is short :— So also in its compounds, except dUigo, intelUgo, negliqo, which make dilcvi, iutelltsl, ncyltxi. ^i70(act), igi^ „,.^„„^^ ^^^^.^_ So al«o clrcumago, \mi M-ith other prepositions d.jo becomes nin, as: InuL-oiio, tra,t^(gi, truiimctum, traMlgh-v cono (cu(igu), cueiji, cuadiim. Jdrio, stem /rrr (throw), jed, Fdciu, Htem/((t (make), feci, jadum, J'uitam, jdcSre. jfdcSre. With prepositions /rrno heconies frdo, /M, fectxm : with other vvonls It reman., fdcio as : cale/ddo, cule/eci, cale/actim. /crt or Ico (strike). fd, Fiojh, stem/«7 (flee), fagi, ictum, {/iigffurus), Ich'e. In some veibs the present stem is strengthened by the addition ot n. ^ Vinco, stem vfc (conquer), Fruiigu, Htem/rag (break), vlci, vklum, vinclire. fregi, fractum, frangSre. ^"^ /rL fre '-""'"P"'^"'^^' P^'frlnoo, psrfrSgi, perfractum, per. mimquo, stem relic (leave behind), rdlqui, rellctum, relinquSre. 2. When the radical vowel is long, the perfect takes si .— Dicn (say), Dtlco (lead), Swio (suck), Frlijo (roast), F!lgo (beat), Fhjo (fix), dixi, diixi, svxi, frixi, flixi, Jixi, dictum, due turn, suction, /rictum. Jlictum, fixam. dlch't. duclre. sugire. frlifire. fllijire. figure. In some verbs the pure stem is strengthened by n. which is retamed m the perfect, and generally also in the supinJ:- ^i".70, stem /7 (form), frnxi, fictum, finqtre. Pmi% stem f,ig (paint), pinxi, prctvm, \vnglre. S^>-u>go,stem . ny(draw), arinxi, strictum, strii,Sre. Fango (drive m), panxi (pSgi), panclum, pmigSre. VERBS OP THE THIIID CONJUGATION. 99 Ango (frighten), anxi, Ciuijo (cjitil), cinxi, Junijo (joiti), junxi, Ediiiikjo (blow tho nose), eminixi, },lniio (snow), nitui, Th>i]o or tiiii/no (dip), tiiixl, DiHtinf/uo (distinguish), liistinxi, So also extiii^au8uin, plaxuUre. So also explodo, explosi, explosum ; complodo and svpplodo. Cedo (givo way), Afitto (send), cefisi(iorcedsi), cessum(iorcedsum), cedh-e. misi. vimuvi, viMere. Note 1.— The following make the perfect in si, though the radical vowel is short : — Divldo (divide), divlsi, Quatio (shake), divlsum, quass am (fr atsum), divldire. qudtSre. The compound conc&tio makes concussi, concussum, concut^re. Note 2. — The following make the perfect in i, though their radical vowel is long : — CMo (forge). cudi, cusum, cud're. Sldo (sit clown), sldi, scssum, sidire. Verto (turn), verti, versum, vertire. 3. The following verhs with stems ending in a dental have re- duplicated perfects : — Cddo (fall), clcldlj c&mm, cddire. So also the compound occldo (perish), ocddi, occdsum, ocddSre. Cui'do (cut down), dcidi, caesum, cacd6rc. So also occldo (kill), occidi, occlsuin. ' Te.ido (stretch), tetendi, tensum also tentum, tendire. •So also the compounds ostendo, extendo, protendo, &c. Pendo (hang), Tinido (pound), J^'indo (split), Scindo (split). p^pendi, penaum, pendSrf.. t&lfidi or tUdi, tun.mm or tusutn, tundiire. fldi, fiasum, find&re. scldi, scisHunit Kindire. Note.— The last two verbs thro* off the reduplication, and retain the short radical vowel. § 96. Verbs with Stems endivrj in a Liquid, 1, m, n, r. 1. Linuid verbs of the third conjugation generally form the perfect in i, ana the supine partly in turn and partly in sum : — Emo (buy, take), imi, emtum, Smire. K'::] if ■' ■ .1 '. I?!/' /m ¥m i i'i- I . !-■■ I \V ' 102 LATIN GRAMMAR. before s and f, as : ' ^ *' '" *''® I'"^«<=*. ^nd generally insert a p Conio (comb), A'wo (take away), -Swrno (tako), i'ramo (take out), compai, (/eiiip.ii, ItHllipni, pronipsi, rjmpfum, comrre. cirmpfnm ^temh-e. siinipfnm (mmtum), sumh-e pnmptuni {promtum, promere Vn'ro (sweep), Snlh (salt), Vel/o (pull), I'erri, vein {vulsi), saf.sinn, vu/,suin. The following havo reduplicated perfects :- verr!-?re; BO a,ho rombuvo. yfrSre, although its vowel is short. Verbs with Stems ending in s. in^trrisiiv^vtt^tex-iLvr;.!^-^' «i- . Vtso (visit), Pinso (pound), Depso (kneail), Tc.m (weave), Ponn (steir. poa, place), pinni, p'mmi, depuni, texui, p6mi, ~ vish-e. ptnsltum, pinsum, phisSre depstum, depaUum, depsh-e. texfum, tpj-g^g pdntlum, ponSre. Most of these form the perfect tenses after the second conjugation. VEUBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION 103 Acuo (sharpen), Art/vo (prove), Di'Ulnio (anoint), Exuo (put off), Imluo (put on), Jmbuo (soak), Mfiiiio (lessen), Htdtiio (set up), (S'ho (sew), 'J'rfljiio (attribute), Liio, aliliio (cleanse), (■o)i(/rn(> (agree), liltluo (fear), Ailiiuo, rniuuo (assent), Spuo (spit), Sleriino (sneeze), Pliio (rain), lino (rusli), Ldvo (wash), Solro (loosen), Volvo (roll), dciii, dcHtum, arijui, ariiutnm. delihui, cieliln'itum, exui, exiitiim, iinhii, inih't/um. imlmi, imhuliim, mimii, riiiiifitiim, St lit III, etiitntitm, sui, Silt inn. triliui, trltmltiin, all id. ablulum. coni/rui, vifilui. adnui, SI ltd, stermd. plid or pluvi, rid, rutiim, Idvi, laulum (lotmn). solvi, soh'itnm, void. volatum, Ucvh'e. aryuh-e. delihiiSre. exjiSre. iiidiiSre. hnlniSre, minvP.re. statvhe. sithe. trihvSre. ahluhe. coiiijniSre. inU litre, adnuhe. spiiiire. sterutiSre. plu?.re. rn&ir, (laviirf), comp.§90,3. solrere. volvire. ¥^^ P rn § 99. Verbs ending in the present in sco are mostly inchoativeB, that is, they denote the beginning of a state or action. Some of them form their perfect tenses according to the second conjugation, and others according to the fourth. Whtn they are derived from verbs they take the perfect and supine from the simple verbs, as : Ahdlesco (from aholeo), Cocllenco (from ), Ohilorniisco (from dormio), Scidco (from scio), ahdlevi, abdiUum, ahSlesctre. codltd, codlUum, coil'efcSie, « , - obdurrnivi. obdonnUum, uldurmisch'e. SCIVI, scitum, scistSre. When they are derived from nouns they form tlie perfect, if they have one, in «(. but have no supine, as : Consiiiiesco (from senex), consSnui, IiKjrdveiico (from ijraxHK), Juveiiesco ((vQinjiirenis), Mdturesco (from maturus), mdliirid, conf!tnesch'e. viijntve.sitre, jiiiPji<;/>c(iri'. VHiturescSre, The following verbs in sen are regarded as simple verbs, the older forms from which they are derived being no longer in use : — Crenco (grow), Olisco (swell), Uisco (from Ido, gape), Nosco (come to know), erei'j, nCvi, cretiim. iiotum, d-escSre. glisi ?re. luMSre, noecSre, 'i' jl i 104 LATIN GRAMMAR. Pasco (feed). ' ««,„■ Qid,:co (vest) ^ '■ ra>^tnm, pascire. In CHAPTER XXVI. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. §100. Most verbs of the fourth coniu-ratioii form th^ir r,„rfo * and 8t,p,ne by adding the suHixes vi an.V/'mto ^e stct as^fn the /-arc/o (cram), farsi, I fartum ovfarctum, farcire ^" 'c";!;'e"S."'' *" ^^""'^^' '' "' ''"'■^"'"'' '''■^"■"'' ^'"'/"•«'. Fuhio (prop), I/aurio (pump), Sancio (ratify), Sarcio (patch), S'litio (feel), S'lepio (fence in), ^Viiido (bind), SitHo (leap), SipZlio (l)urj), Viiiio (come), Avikio (clothe), A/i^rio (open), OpSrio (cover), Eo (go). hausi, ftanxi, sarsi, nensi, viiixi, sa/iii or salii, sSpSUvi, veiii, dmictd or dmixi, (Iph'ui, Sph'ui, ivi. fultum, hauatum, eamMum or sanctum, eartian, senfiuvi, snepturn, vhictiim, salt am, sSpttltum, veil turn, dmictum, upcrtiim, dpertum. Hum, fulclre. haurire. sancire, sarclre. sentire. saeplre, viiiclre. satire. sSpSllre. vSuir?, Urnlcire. dpSrlre. dpSrire. ire. Note.— The compounds of salio change the a into i ni,ri t„ *\. into u, a, : dcsUio, U.ilui, Uesultum; .,1^^ 'i:t:;i!^ Z^ST CHAPTER XXVII. DEPONENT VERBS. § 101. 1. The deponents of the first oor,\.,oifirr «-- -v - ■ ■ j DEPONENT VERBS. 105 Fateor (confess), fassus sum, fatSri. The compounds confiteor, pm/iteor, have confcssus and pro- fensua sum. MMrror (pity), Reor (think). mfi.'rUus or mtsertus sum, mMreri. rdtiiH Sinn, reri. 2. There are many deponents of the third conjugation, which form their perfects apparently in an anomalous manner : Fivor (enjoy), fntctus or fruitus sum, friii. Future participle /(•Mi7«J7<.'(. Ftnnjor (perform), Gnhlior (step), fundus sum, gressus sum. funiyi. grddi. Compounds change the a inti^ e, as aggre.dior, corxjredior ; aijgressus and covgressus sum. Labor (slip), Liquor (melt), LjCxjuor (speak), Mdrlor (die), lapsus sum, {I'lijuef actus sum), Idcutas sum, viorluiis sum. Future participle mlSrlturus. Mtnr (strain), nixus or 7iisus sum, Pdtior (suffer), passus sum,' But perpelior, perpessus sum. Qnh'or (complain), questus sum, Riiifjor (snarl), Si'quor (follow), Ulor (use), Ittvertor (return), A m/i/ectnr (embrace), Conipli'cfor (embrace), Apifcor (olttain, stem a/j), A(lfj)i/icor (ol tain, stem op), Comiiihiiscor (devise), JiSinliiiyor (remember), DPJ'fti-:ror (grow weary), E.rp('r(/ixcor (svake up), Imscor (am angry), \aiiciscor (obtain), JVa«cor (am born), Obliviscor (forget). sSaltus sum, vxHs sum, {rcuersus sum), am.jik.rAis sum, coinpfe.nix sum, aptus sum,, tiifrptiis sum, comuieiiius sum, di}j'e,ssus sum, txperrerfus sum, (iratus sum), nnctiis sum, ndfus sum. oblitus sum, P(1cl"cor (make an agreement), pachts sum (pepigi), Prd/idscor (set out), prd/eclus sum, U/ciscor (avenge), ultus sinn, Vescor (eat), ' labi. I'lqui. Idqui. mOri. niti. pdti. quh-i. rtngi. sSqui. fit I. rSi^erli. ampfecti. complecti. apiici. (idlpisci. commlnisci, ri&uilnisci. dd/ctiaci. expi^rrjUci. iriisri. na)ici,sci. nnsci. ob/.ivisci. 2)ilciscL prd/icisci. ulcisci. react. / ' ' K-rl I m 106 LATia GRAMMAR. -<4,WH/;f»- (aaaoiit), J'J.rj>?rii,r (try), 0/>/)rri„r (wiiit for), M,tior (nii-asino), Ordior (liegiii), Orior (ari.se), Future partioijilo, orlfiirm. assn,.y sum, nMsfvtlri orUi.s mm, ^,.^.^. ;>.-.r. or ,.•;,.„•. 'n, Hr.ne i^'t 7^: . w '/r'n'"'^' -« "'ay cither u',^. r^'.: CHAPTER XXVIII. IRREGULAJl AND DEFECTIVR VERBS added to the stem Afn^t J' fi • *^^- **'""i»!itioii8 are from tlie tactUmt di^St ieuses of ' "" ^^'-'^^ti"", or vatives and eomp^Lls^n^rt be ad^I^d- bJ /. '^^'^^' ^^"- jugated like the simple verbs. ^^''^'^ '^^^ ^°^^- As to sMw, see § 77. §103. Possittn (1 am ablo nr T « \ • ;>o( (fmm polis, ,-U aWri ;„7 . ". " 1 <^<»»P»™d of » f IRUEaULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEHB8. 107 InDU'ATIVR. I'reseiit. Sing. Po8-8um, I am able, I P6t 63, thou art able or (;!iiist. PSt-est, heisable or can. Subjunctive. Pos-sim, I am able, or may be able. P08-8iS. P08-8lt. Plnr. Po3-S\imu8, wo are al)le. I Pos-simus. Pdt-eslis, you are able. \ Pos-sitis. P08-SUnt, they are able. \ Po8-8int. Imperfect Sing. P6t-Sram, 1 was able, or 1 could. P5t 6ra8,tliouwastable. P6t-6rat, he was able. Plur. P6t-€rainii8, we were abh;. P6t-6ratls, you wei-e able. P6t-6rant, they were able. Pos-sem, I was, or should be, able. Possea Posset. Pos-semus. Pos-setls. Po8-8eat r- Future. Sing. P6t-6ro, I shall be able. Pot-6ri8, thou wilt be able. Pot-erit,hewill beable. Plur. Pot-giImU8, we shall be al)]e. Pot-6ritis, you will be able. Pot- grunt, they will be able. None I* * I. In ill I ii 108 LATIN QRAMMAR. rNDICATIVE. Sing. P6t-ui, I was able, or have been able. Pot-uisti. Fot-uit. Plur. Pot-ulmus. Pot-uistis. Pot-uerunt, or ere. Perfect. Subjunctive. P6t-ugrim, I have been, or may have been able. Pot-ueris. Pot-uerit. Pot-ugrJmua. Pot-uerltis. Pot-uerint. Pluperfect Sing. P6t-u6ram, I haJ been Pfit-uissem ab'e. ' Pot-ueras. Pot-udrat. Plur. Pot-ueramus. Pot-ueratis. Pot-uerant. been able. Pot-uissea. Pot-uisset. I might have Pot-uissemus. Pot-uissetis. Pot-uiseent Future Perfect. Sing. P6t-u6ro, I shall have been able. Pot-ueria. Pot-udrit. Plur. Pot-ugrimus. Pot-ueritis. Pot-uerint. None. Infinitive. Present, Pos-se, to be able. Perfect, P6t-uisse, to have been able. Participles. Pdtens is used only as an adjective The imperative does not exist. = "powerful.' IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 109 § 104. Edo (I eat) may be conjugated regularly after the third conjugation, perfect edl, supine esum, infinitive Sdere ; but several of its forms by syncope become like the corre- sponding tenses of the verb 'sum. Tiie following are the cases in which this resemblance occurs : — ^ .■■... Indicative. Subjunctive Present. Imperfect. Sing. Edis or es, gdit or est. flddrem or essem, ederes or esses, fideret or esset. I \ Ederemus or essemus, dde- i retis or essetis, ederent or I esseut. Plur. Editis or estis. Present. Sing. Ed6 or es. Plur. Edite or este. Imperative. Future. Edito or esto. Edito or esto, Sditote or estote. fi. lU Infinitive. > Ed§re or esse. In the passive the syncope takes place in ^iditur, Ssittr, and Meretur, essetur. The same syncope occurs in the compounds of edo, as : comedo, comedis = comes, comedit = contest, covitdire = comesse, &c. §105. The verb/e/o (I biing or bear) takes its perfect tUli and its supine latum from tofh. The imperfect tenses often omit the connecting vowel between the stem and the termination, Ml no LATIN GRAMMAR. I Active Voice. SURJUNCTIVB. Indicative. Prese'it. ®^^^- ^^^^;°;. J^J-8' fer-t, I , Fer-am. fSr-as. fgr-St. I •! Imperfect. *'°8- ^^f^"*^™' '■"-^'''S' Fer-em, fer-res, fer-rtt. Plur. Fer-ebam«s, fer-ebatis, Fer-rSmus, fer-retis, fer-rent. it M* 1 ' Fuvure. Sing. F6r-am, f6r-es, fdr-gt. Plur. Fdr-emu8, f6r-etis, ^°'^®' fer-ent. i Perfect Sing. Till i, tul-isti, tul it, ul-iinus, tiil-i tul-erunt or erd Plur. Tul-iinus, tiil-istis, Tul-erimus, tul-dritis. Tiil-grim, tiil-grfs, tiil-grft. tiil. Pluperfect. Sing, lul-eram, 6ras, 6rat \ T-al-issem, isses, issgt. Plur. Tiil-praTYtn erant. "> eratis, j Tui-issemus, issetis, isseut. irreoular and defective verbs. Indicative, Subjunctive. Future Perfect. Sing. Till iro, dris, Srit. ■ni m >- 1 X - w ^ , . None. Plur. Tul-6rimu8, entis, , Srint. I 111 Presfint. Sing. F8r. Plur. Per-tS. Jmpf.rative. I Fer-to. I Fer-to. I Fer-tote. ! Per unto. Future. Infinitive. Present, Fer-re. Perfect, Tiil-isse. Future, La-turum (am, urn) esse. GrERUND. F6r-endi, fgr-endo, fer-endum. Supine. La-tum and la-tu. Participi.ks. Presenf, FSr-ens. Future, La-turus, a, um. Passive Voice. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Sing, Pgr-or, fer-ri8, fer-tur, 1 am borne, (fee, Plur, Pfir-Imur, f6r-imini, ffir-untur. F6r-ar, aris, atur. Fer-amur, amini, antur. « f t" \y US if f A" , w 1 1 !'«■ ' ATIK GRAMMAR. Sl'ttMNCTIVB. Impfrfect. "'"• ^^Sr "'•'"*■"'"'• ^^«j,X"' '"-"■»"«• '"- Future, Sing. Pgr-ar, eris, etur. Pliir. Pgr-emur, emini, ^'^'^®- entur. : Per/ret. Future Perfect. Sing. La-tu3 (a, urn) ero, i T - i.. / X i None, fiur. La-ti (ae,a) erimus, .fee. ' Imperative. Sbg. Per. '■""'• .j,„.t„, ^"'"- ! Per-tor. Plur. PgriO" %-untor. irregular and defective verds. iis Infinitive. Present, Fer-ri. Perfect, Latum (am, um) ecsa Future, La-tum iri. Participles. Perfect, La-tus, a, um. Gerundive, Fer-endus, a, um. Note. —All the compounds of fem aro conjutjiiteil liko the simple verb, as: affrro (from ad -.uxAfiro), attilli, inll'ituin, or (i//i'ihini ; a iiffro (from ab anil /f(vi), (ih.-'hili, (il)fi(/iiiii, inifdiT : oiTiro (froiii dIi ami /Vm), ohltiH. ob- tut Hill ; .HHiTn-i) (from Aitli and /'(•■»), miiihiti. unlitittiiia {\\mh\ as the perfect Hiiil nui)iiic of the vi-rl) tottnf ; i/ifrm (from ueris, Mal-uerim, ueris Pluperfect. V6l-ui33ein,uissQ3, Ndl-ui3sem,uis3e3, Mal-uissem, uissea '^°' &c. ^c. L :S^ i Present, Imperative. N61-i, nolitg. Future. Sing. iTol ito. Nol-ito. riur. Nei-itotd. Nol-unto. irregular and defective verbs. Infinitive. Present, Vel-lg. Nol-le. Mal-lS. Perfect, Vol-uisse. Nol-uisse. Mal-uisse. Participles. Present, Vol-ens. Nol-ens. U5 § 108. The verb eo (I go) belongs to the fourth conjuga- tion, and is aliacst regular. Its stem consists of a simple I, which before a, o, and u is changed into e. *••-.. l]Vi Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Sing. E-0, i-3, 1-t. * j Earn, e-as, eat. Plur. I-mus, i-tis, e-unt. ! E-amus, e-atis, e-ant ii''.!V'l Imperfect. Sing. I-bam, i-bas, i-bat, &c. | I-rem, i-res, i-ret, (to. Future. Sing. I-bo, i-bis, i-bit, &c. | None. iv Perfect. Sing. I-vi, i-visti, i-vit, &c. | I-verim, i-v6ri8, i-v6rit, :%■■ !^U ;r ,1, ■ >«^ Vi mi ■ill ■■i' . lift ° LATIN GRAMMAR. Infinitive. Present, Fl-dri. -^er/ec^ Tac-tum (am, urn) essa Jfuture, rac-tnm iri. Participles. Present, None. Perfect, Fac-tu8, a, um. Gerundive, Fac-i-endus § 111. Defective verbs are ihn^f- t^f ,.,1,; i, 1 fonm occu,. i„ Latin autl.o" il vtb^atrif °-''^"' and their'conj„,.ation is quite r^t^ '" """ ""*"' '^"'''^ Coep-i. Coep-isti. Coep-it, &c. Coep-6ram, Coep-6ro. Memln-i. Memin-isti. Memin-it, &c Indicative. Perfect. Od-i. Od-isti. Od-it, &c. Nov-I. Nov-isti. Nov-it, (fee Pluperfect. MSmln-eram, Od-gram. Future Perfect. M6mrn-6ro. Od-ero. N6v-gram. Nov-gro. lEREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERES. 119 Subjunctive. Perfect. Coep-Srim. Memin-erim. Od-erim. Nov-erim. Pht.pei'fect. Coep-issem. Mgmin-issem. Od-issem. Nov-issem. Sing. Plur. Imperative. Fiiture. Mgmen-to. Memen-tote. Coep-isse. Infinitive. Mdmin-isse. Od-isse. N5v-isse. Coep-tus. Coep-turus. Participles. Perfect. 0-SUS (hating). Future. O-siirus. Note. — Coepi haa also a passive coeptm {a, uni) sum which is used in connection with other passive verbs— domris aedificari coepta est (the build- ing of the house was commenced). § 113. Of dio (I say, I say yes, or I affirm), only the following forms occur : — Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. Sing. Aio, aig, Mt Plur aiunt. SilStS, aiat. aiant. >i'i if;* Pi' '.>.' K' '■m -■ft 120 11 ' 'I ' •♦ I* ' 1, •* m LATIN GRAMMAR, Indicative. SaBJUNCTivB. Aiebam, aiebas, aiebat, ■« following Present. Indioativk. Sing. Inquam, inquis, in- quit. ! Plur. Inquimus, inquTtis, inquiunt J ■Perfect. inquisti, inquit. Imperfect. — inquibat aiul iuquiebat. Present. Inque. Imperative. Future. . inquies, inquigt Future. Inquito. Sing ■' PJur Hl^' ■-' ' ^■- i '■ Indicative. Subjunctiye. faris, fatur. None. PJur. [Famur,famini] — IRHEOULAR AND DEFECTIVK VEKBS. Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperfect. [Fabar]. ( [Farer, &c.]. Future. Fabor [fabgris], fabitur. | None. Perfect. Fatus [a, urn] sum, &c. | Fatus [a, urn] sim, &a Pluperfect. Fatus [a, um] eram, «fec. | Fatus [a, urn] essem, ted," or " good-day," '< I am glad to see you." Apwje IS used ni the sense of " begone," or •' be off." Sometimes the pronoun te is added. Salve, i)hiral salvete, and future salveto, are used in the ^ sense ut " hail," or " be welcome." Vale or r(i/(");e signify " farewell." ,§ 119. Of ovare (to rejoice, or celebrate an ovation), there occur only Ovcis, ovat, ovclret, ovandi, maturus, dvatus, and ovans. ' V ' m\ I*! CHAPTER XXIX. IMPERSONAL .VERBS. § 120. Impersonal verbs are used only in the third person singular, and can have neither a substantive nor a substan- tive pronoun for their subject. They state only in a general way that sometlung hai)penH, as : phdt, it rains : licet, it is I)erinitted ; oportet, it is necessary. Some impersonal verbs describe the various states of the weather, as: Pluit, it rains. Ninii'if, it SHOWS. Grunilinat, it hails. Lci/)i(l(U or lapidatum est, stones full from heaven. Lncescit and iUuceitdt, it dawns. FuliiUrat a.nd/uhnii>at, it lightens. Tdiuif, it thunders. Vespirascit and adveapSrascit, it grows dark. Others describe certain states of the mind, and require the person in wlmm the state of mind exists in the accusative : Mr^^ret (me) I pity, perfect mMrnum est, mlmrtum est, or mUUruit foenltet (vie), I repent, perfect poenUuit. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 128 PMet{me), I am ashamed, perfect pudwt or pitdUnm est. n^t'i ^T\ i"" ^*'««"»t«rbs. In regard to their form they may be divided into three classes : ' 1. Primitive Adverbs, as: nunc, now ; jam, already; saepe often ; satif<, enough ; to wliich may bo added many prepo'- sitions which are used in their original sense as adverbs, as • ante, before, or earlier ; post, after, or later. 2. Adverbs formed from adject{ven by the terminations e o, and ter, answering to the English hj, as: male, badlv', rarij, rarely ; snjyii'iitc.r, wisely. (a.) Adjectives ending in us and er belonging to the second declension, including all superlatives, form ad erbs by the ternunation c, as: a/fus (high), alte ; pulcher (beautiful), puMire ; miser (wretched), m.isere. (h.) Adjectives of the third declension form adverbs bv addmg ter to their stem, and where tlie stem itself ends in }, this t is dropped, as : mpiens (stem sapient), mpienlar ' fortis (stem forti), fortiter ; ferox (stem fmyci),ferociter. ^;^'",'^"~^"I-"'' '"■■'K''' "\"L^ commonly amlarfer than andadter, and diJiiaUs sometimes makes dt])iculU,; rarely ilijUdNtcr or d/ffidle. (c.) The neuter gender of adjectives in the comparative is also used as an adverb, as : aJti^ts, higher or mort :ji.rhlv • puJchrius, more beautiful or more beautifully ; fortius, braver or more bravely. . ((/.) Adjectives which form their degrees of comparison irregularly, are also irregular in the formation of adverbs, as: Adverbs. Bonus (good), bene, Mdlus (bad), 7nale, Multus (much), multum, Magmis (great), magnOperS, Parvus (little), (parum), melius, optime. ■pejus, jMSfiitne. plus, jjbl.rimum, mdgis, laaxime. minus, minime and minimum. ADVERBS. 120 diutissime. nuperrime. snejHssime, (e.) Aflvrrbs formed from fidjoctives have, of conrso, thoir degr(3os of con.pariaon ; but besidea them the following, also nro coiiipjired : " fir ^1""^'^' uv ^^^'^^'> ^Satjs (onodgh), ,^ti Nuper (latflv), ^aepe{ohv,n) - SScus (otborwiso), ,,.,/,,,^ leinp^n (i.e., tempdri, otliervvi.se), temperius, 3 Adverbs wbich are ori-inally cases (ablative and accim- ^Zlf. TTn' "V ^'''t ^*'"" '''^^"'^•'^' ^h'^t i«- ^"^- ""thill,., gratis); ^l'TL^ ' wiulou't difrS.'l'n/'lJ''*''"^"' "' "■' ^'"■'" '^^'^'-'rba both in e and in ter CttiS'^'' ^■~'^'''° """""^"^^ '« often used adverbially. This is always the \l:\ \l **te "''"*•';• °^ ^'J® comparative. See above, No. 2, (r). ,»,/; \ . I""*'t'^'o of adjectives expressing number or n easure as- 4 ,.^":;r s:«;;:„" -.as:-, ■x.t^^ra.i— ■• ™* ^ ^OTE 4. -There are yet several other forms of adverbs some endin- in TroS' xJtt^lJ^.^7^^^^ ^^^ gO'l«; f'^ndUn,. from the n " • i" -'T ' 'v,c/.ci<««, from the root ; pemtus, thorouehlv. Some! jft,r.!j, are eu.,ij,ouiid words, as : maynopere, greatly; quotidic or rottliJ ^^'^"'SZ every :^ear;,.«.a^J,„;„fi„ wL't Cnner /SS Soubt? ' °' namely; ni»u»<«,«, no wonder, without . . > -»* A" 126 LATIN GRAMMAR. 1 1 : '. 'f "¥■ mi CHAPTER XXXI. PREPOSITIONS. ,i\VnL ^''"PT^^'""^ ^''^ originally adverbs, and nmny are St 11 often mod as such. They all express originally Ku-il niot.on to a place, or ,„oti.,n from a plaee. But in a more ex ended sense they also express relations of cause and tinm. All th.'se relations art; expressed in Latin hy two cases the acousat.ve and the aMative, and hence only [hese two Ue rrepaS;::.'"''' ''' "■' '" '' " "^'""^ ^•^^'<'' '"'^ ^— -J h- sat^vf f_^^' following prepositions always govern the accu- M to or near. , j^^^ta, close by. Ai/versus or adversmn, oppo- Ob, on account of. site, against. ^l/< mmuuo: I.efore ; and r it is assimikted, as Uludo,' i^idlo' before other consonants it remains unchanged. ' ' i"^' "'.rf "^ '" coii'l'osition assimilates its 6 to c,/, 7, m. and |7 as • tvr- rvefor"un£alin^ ''"'""*"^' ^^"^"^ "^^'^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^-*' - ^""5 ,.§ ^^^j. P^ P^"*^P"«i*i""s (or adverbs), a»i6 (around), ifis or rft (in difterent directions), re or reW (back), and se or *'?t^ (aside), are never used by themselves, but occur only in composition. ^ i!/ * ' A'l 128 LATIN GPAMMAR. r^^P^^i^'^IS^^ «i-pa the 6 before The sa.e is the case w\th Ji'SlTiiyr/.S b^^jf -• CHAPTER XXXII. f I? 'I < ... I fUt p ii CONJUNCTIONS. § 130. Conjunctions are words sprvm» +.^ «^^ ve (or) ; nm«;, «rr% .'1/,;l„ ?,? !,' ' "^""^ '{"^ ('''"^) : «"^ M e<;«m^;„o/«.;„e2r(al8or ' °' ""''^ ' '""''' •^■^" <"'' ^^^' neS?a\Tt?rn:£r" s"\t',rZ!^^^ *.^ *^« ^^"'''^ ^^-^ i« -n- p;»;^mn,.,svr, more or cs . F^i Tlv r'sL ?' 'Tf' '■'"''} *»'« People ; only a shortened form for atj:, aLr^^^.^nr.'.S^^S™/- -/• ^'^ '^ aWame;, (yet, but yet) vlnn J .^L' "^'^'"^ ^'^"^ yet) ; /am.», .™j. (^oniy. provided 4at) ; ^^^iSj^^^Vt^ nol^; 5. Causa! Conjunctions, as : guum (as. since) ; ^uod, <,ui, ^uoniam P-i.. < CONJUNCTIONS. 18 the b before ' n, as : anceps actus (a bend- Ijen the word redco, redimo. lit aeditio. 129 (because) ; quandoquidem (seeing that) ; nam, namque, enim, ctcntrn (for). ' 6. Final Conjunctions, expressing a purpose or intention, as : ut uh quo (in order that, or that thereby) ; quin, quominm (that not) ; no, neve, neu (that not, lest). 7. Temporal Couj unctions : quum, vt, uhi (when); aiUvquam, priu.s- quam (before) ; iwdquam (after) ; i^unulac or simulatmw (as soon as) ; donee, dum, quoad funtil). 8. Conclusive Conjunctions, as : enjo, i<,ltuT, itaque, idea, idcirco (therefore accordingly) ; quodreu, quare, qmipropkr, quam- obrem (wherefore) ; m,de (whence, wlierefore). ^ ^ ' ^ Note. -The 8))ecial uses of all these conjunctions and the influence Hjey exercise upon the construction of sentences will be explained in the ,'•'/ lect words 3 in ,vhich ber simple, that ; or I although; fl to their isses : — s or clauses 3 it were, on I) ; aut, vel, stu (or if); nch is con- the people ; f rel. Ac is sive. 'he English st) ; tamm, t indeed) ; • ,H- CHAPTER XXXIII. INTERJECTIONS. ^ ^i^^V^'*^® Interjections scarcely deserve to be called a part of speech; they are mostly mere sounds or cries expressive of some mental emotion, of joy, grief, wonder, surprise, and the like, as : 1. Cries of joy : io, ha, evoe, eu, euqe, &c. 2. Cries of grief : ah, heu, eheu, hei, vae, &c. 3. Cries of wonder an.l surprise : 6, en, eecS, pdpae, ittat, &c. 4. Cries of disgust : phul, djxltj^, hui, vah, vae, &c. To these may be added the oaths viehercle, hercle, pof, edSpol, '^f'^'Vfns, and a number of other exclamations. sJch a ;;a/bo still ; infandum, for shame ; belle, weU done, &c. /^ . " '.-, > Ml It he English Inin viodo, only not) ; mamquam, Ilitr tV>>if\ . ,*- I, quoniam 1J ' "n Vr ' 1' ill "' 11 1^ J;*. . I V t , ' , f PART II.-SYNTAX. CHAPTER XXXIV. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE — ATTUIBUTE- TIVE PRONOUN. -APPOSITION RELA- ^ 132. Syntax teaches us in wliat nuuuier we Imve to apply words and then- dilierent foms so as to pro.luce sentences! llie simplest sentence consists of a subject and predicate —that IS ot a person or thing spoken of, and that which is said (predicated) of it, as : A';najli(it. E>[HUts currit. The water flows. The horse runs. The subject is m the nominative case, and mav be a substantive a personal pronoun, or any word or combination of words which supply the place of a substantive, as : Equus airrit. Sapienlfcs doLriit. Bona, cippetinitiiv. Errare Itmivnium es^t. Qui hoc fecerit punietur. Pro patria mori honestum est. The horse runs. I write. Wise men teach. Good tliiiis^s are desired. To err is liunian. Whoever lias done this will be punished. To die for one's country is honourable. §133. The predicate consists cither of u verb or of -i noun-that is, of an adjective or a .substantive. 1 he latter case a link (copula) is required to connect the subject ■i SUBJECT AND PEEDICATE. 131 with the predicate. This link is usually the verb esse Cto be), as : ^ Puer bonus est. Ciceio erat orator. Dmdpulus dUiijenltssimus est. The boy is good. Cicero was an orator. The scholar is most diligent. But there are many other verbs besides esse, which are used as a copula, and may be termed copulative verbs, as : vid^or I seem ; maneo, I remain ; duro, I endure ; Jio, I become ': evado, 1 turn out or become ; creor, I am created ; delinor, 1 am elected ; dcdaror, I am declared ; dicor, ajypelUyr, vocor nominor, I am called ; demjnor, I am appointed ; judicor, 1 am judged; and some others, as: Canis viddur acer. Cniii>i dkitiif acer. Cfiru-'i crcatur rex. Jiumulus apptUatus est rex. The dog seems fierce. The (log is called tierce. Cyrus is created king. Komulus was called king. § 134. When the predicate is a verb, it must agree with the subject in number and person, and it nuist be observed that all substantives represent the third person, as : Millies clamant. Noti' clanuDnics. I ill clamant. The soldiers call out. We call out. They call out. When there is more than one subject the predicative verb must be 111 the plural, and if they are of ditlerent persons tl.e verb is put in the first person plural, if there is a tirst person among the subjects, and in the second if there is among them a second and no first person. In all other cases the verb is iii the third person plural, as : Eijo etfrater amhidamus. Tu etfrater tuus ambalatis. Hie etfrater ejus ambulant. I and my brother take a walk. Youaud your brother take a walk. He and his brother take a walk. Note l.^-Sometimes when there are two or more subjects, the verb (preoicate) agrees only with the one nearest to it. especia ly if it is the uiore important one or implies the others, as: IvIumL dcoruVa unmworum tviqiutas vocat vn,, tlie will of the gods and the injustice ti^^ll '""'r^' '''^ "?• '^'^''^ '^ '^'' '^' especially, when two subS only one biiy '"' ^'"^ ^vished-the Senate and the people forming Note 2.-8ometuaes a collective substantive, x.e., one implying a num- *v, ■?!/■■ -I (I V^A ■1. 132 LATIN GRAMMAR. I . • I I. ''J ,'.: J-i- • I i ber of persons or tliii)-H though itself in the singnlar, lias the predicate in tlie plural, as : par!i ,nni;na iriiirinit, a greiit pint {of men) went. This i.s tlio caso esjifc.ially with such substiuitivcs as Jiirevtits (tho young men) cxarttus (an auny), dassis (a llect), and paj.tilus (the people). § 135. Wlien the predicate is an adjective, it must agree with llie subject in gendtr, muuber, and case, as : Miff^i est cnllhlaa. MUilcfi mnt r.nUidi. Soror est i)it/c/irii. Snrores sunt pitlchme. 'J>inplum est iiHKjimni. Teinpla sunt maijna. The soldier is cunning The soldiers .ire cunning. Tho .sister is beautiful. The sisters are beautiful. Tho temple ia large. The temples are large. When there are two or more subjects of the same gender, the lu-edicative adjective is either put in the yilural of the gender of the subjects, or agrees only with the subject nearest to it, as : Militesetcenturionesimpavidltrani. The soldiers and captains were ^ fearlefc'i. borores el mater meamortiine sunt. My sisters and my mother are dead. Templa et castella permagna erant. The temples and castles were very great. Sorores et mater mea morlua est. My sisters and my mother are dead. But when the subjects are of different genders and denote persons, the jiredicate is commonly in the plural of the masculine, if there is a masculine among the subjects, as : Pater et mater mortui sunt. My father and mother are dead. When the subjects are names of inanimate things, the predicative adjective is generally in tlie neuter jilural ; but when the subjects are names of persons mixed with names of things, the predicative adjective may either follow the gender of the persons, or it may be put in the neuter plural, as : Imperiu, hmores, vktoriae fortuita Powers, honours, and victories ■■*""/• are accidental. Multl hostea et arma capti (or capta) Many enemies and arms were «""'. taken. Note 1.— In this case also it frequently happens that the \ idicative •ujectivo agrees only with the subject nearest to it. St'BJECT AND PREDICATE. 133 tI,™!fT *''*'"'. P''°'^'*'^*'^« adjective is used substantively in tu) neuter genciermospective or tiie gender of the subject, as: (umlest N . f ;'''• '^ '^''"""' ''^ '^ y"7'"°' =^"'1 '^'"-'^y'" changeal.le thing. ^,)t Z '°'"'' ^"'"' '^'^ ^"'' ■'^" ■"^^■^'■'' "^ •■^ predicate instead of an adject, ens : om>n<, s,nU ,rrt,, aU thills are right ; inccptnm frJlra est tlie un.lortnk.ng ,.s use!..ss ; ho,!ex t.rope .vnU, the enenues'arrnear ' iNoi . 4 -^hoaictiincs a predicative adjective agrees not with the gram- matical subject, but rarl,.r -.v,th wl>at is meant by the subject as Ma co,;Mu,n,, cac>^, .,nU, the hearis of the conspi.Ly were-'scour'ed • £ miiha host nun capti sunt, two thousand enemies were captured 1 136. When the prclicate is a substantive, it can as a rule agree with the suhject only in case, as: Maecenas est duke decus meuin. Maecenas ti) nie. is a sweet ornament But wlion tlie pvedicativt? su1).stanti\-.! has two jrendeva, as • rex, feminine m/ma; nuajis/r-r, feminine vu<(jl^m: it 'also agrees m gender with the subject, as: Philo.^opliia ('■•''- made consul. '«, 4 I-- m r -' '-'iH ■ <■■* ■'; Vi ..4n.l 134 LATIN GRAMMAU. ;/'£■■ I^.^ ■' l./M ■; En'-' A substantive in apposition to anotlier must ahvays be in the same case with it. ^ NoTK.--]:t often happens that the prediciito agrees with the noun in apposition, instead of witli the subject itself, and tliis is tlie case especially when the name of a town has the apposition urhs, cia;ns, or opi'idinn, as Athenue, urhs nobiUssinm, direpla est, Athens, the most illustrious city, was plundered. , u»i- §138. The predicate may bo enlarr^ed by adverbs, adverbial combinations, and, when it consists of a transitive verb, by the addition of an object in the accusative, as : Amicus mens hone dormivit, Sfrriis ex urhcfiiriii. 6'c'rvus claxi ex urbefuQit. My friend has slept ■well. TliG slave fled froin the city. The slave lied secretly from the Boms pater filio spleml^dum llbriim Tlie i^'oo-l father gave to his son a <''''<"'• splemlid book. Note. -Both the subject and the object of a sentence, as well as anv other part, may again be enlarged in various ways, especially by the Won '" ''^'^^ *'^'""""' "^ '''^"*''' '^'^ "^'''^^ ^""^'^ *" ^V"''^' §139. An attributive adjective, like the predicative adjective, agi-ees with its substantive in gender, number and case, hence : ' Pater bonus. Pdtris f)oni. Milter bona. 3Iatr'ifi bonae. Mafimtm te.mplum. Md'jni temp/i. A good father. Of a good father. A good motlier. Of a good mother. A lar!4e temple. Of a large temple, &c. NoTE.-W]ien the attributive adjective belongs to several substantives It generally agrees only with the one nearest to it. uosranuves, §140. (1.) A relative pronoun, which always refers to a person or thing mentioned before, nmst agree with it in gender, number, and person; its case depends upon the circumstances of the clause in which it occurs, as : Til, qui (or if a woman is spoken You, who ought to have stood by to, quae) vu/u culesse debuUi, me, have brought me no help Ego qui rempuldkam servavi, in- I who have saved the state, havo viUiu oppremis sum. been crushed by hatred. SUBJECT AND KELAI'IVK. 135 tvays be in li the nown 13 tlie case 3, ciiL'is, or s, the most adverbial 3 verb, by a city. 7 from the io his son a .veil as any illy by the 2 to speak medicative fiber, and Jfostes, qui urbem ceperunt, suhito The em mios, who had taken tlie av/uycrunt. city, suthlouly took to tlight. JJonpi'H, quern bmiqne acctperam. The sininger, whom 1 had kiiuily Jiliam vienm ahduxit. rew-ived.civiTitdotiiny daughter. Puer, CM* librum dederam, nior- Tlie boy, to whom I luul given the tiiUK est. book, is dead. Note.— Aa the rehtivc pronoun niity itself be ihc subject of a clause and have a substaTitivo for its im-uicate, the relative generally ngrees witli this predicative substantive, us : Tarintum pr,>f(rtu^ (.at, (jiuic (not qiiiid) est urbs fiali'tc, he went to 'j'arentuni, whicli i.i a city of Italy ; idim vi'lle (itqjie idem, nolle, ca (not id) diiiunn vera amicitia ed, (2.) When a velativo pronoun h:is a wliule clause for its antecedent, that ckuise is treated as a nentor substantive, tlie relative accordingly is quod, or more coniuionly i i quod (a thing which), as : Timoli'oii, id ([iiod dijjki'ius jntta- Timoloon bore j)rnsperity much tur, niullo tiltpieidiii'i lidd mcun- more wisely tlian adv<"r;;ity, a dam qiiam ad nrmiii /nrltiu'mi, tiling whi(;h is thowglit more diliicnlt. N<.>TE. — Sometimes a relative has no apparent antecedent, in which case qui must be rendered by •'ho -who" v.r " they who," and quae by •' tho.se things whieh,' as: qui /jalriaid ainat, non d'diiUi'nt jiva en iiioricuionptitre. he who loves his country, will not hesitate to die for it ; quae ad ViC deluUdi noii vera sunt, the thiuj;s wlneh yvn have reported to me are not true. Sometimes, however, tlie real ajitocedent follows after tlie relative, as quae ad me detulisli, ca non sunt vera : qui petuluntcs sunt, eos procul a te remove, keep far avay from you those who are petulant. '■A l\i ;^'i bstantives, fers to a th it in ipon tlie I stood by no help. ate, have id. CHAPTEK XXXV. ' THE NOMINATIVE. § 141. The nominative is called the casus rectus, while the other cases are termed oblique cases, casus ohliqui. The subject of a sentence and the predicate, when it con- sists of a declinable word, are both in the nominative (§ Vi'l). Note.— The only cases in which the subject and predicate of a clause are not in tlie nominative occur in the construction of the accusative with the ialinitive, and in the ablative absolute ; in the former the subject and predicate are in the accusative, and in the latter in the ablative. Ihese points will be explniued later on. % 1 '« :.!| A, I ' i 4 t '■' , 1^ >' 136 LATIN GRAMMAR. S nrSinlf .'■"'"'^"^''^'•^'^ t'^'-^t t^° copulative verbs mentioned in Lnv r " !."" '"••■■^•""ff ••*'•« only ino,liHcations of esse, have the predicate in the noiuiiiative, lik«^ r.w«, r.r,. .■ ' Catilma hmVs ;„dicaf,,, r.t. (Jatilinc .vas declare,! an enemv MnnUnnes uUcjrne mnnehnnt. Tlie fortifications remained entire '' • ageoiis and bi-ave. t\Jv\TT: \7^^- ^Tl *''" I"'"\u^; on; ciirrefxiliir, runuinL' was going on ; pmjnatur, fi^'hting is giMMfr on. t'omiiare S 12.'.. Note 2. — It must be observed that some verbs are ti^nsitive in oni' language, but not in others, 'riuis 1 per-sinolo. f pardon, 1 obey, I trust, and others are in Knglish tririsitive. but in Latin tl'ey are not, and govern tiie tU-i mm, I )>iM.;nude my brotlior; mihi iicrguadf- tur ov persnnifum <$(, I h'h persuaded. NOTK .S. — Many verbs whicli sue in th(;niselves infmnsitivc, may become transitive by being coinponnded willi sueli ]);epositiona ns circiim, in, ob, per, prarter, and tnnis, as : i ' ,' -• f u ^>* t:i iij * f 'I i li:'". H I' '"' /*' 138 LATIN UKAM.MAR. mode of speaking, for o!fo crram, I si-icll of wax, is the same as ohoodorfm ccrne. JSo also Ci/r/opn siltare - mlitnr xnllnm (hicloinn, to dance the dunce of a (JyclopH ; riiirtre Ohjmpia.-- riiicere viriiiriam Otymiiiorum, to gain a victory at Dlyinjiia. NoTR 'J.— The neuter of afljnctivcs. b(.th in the Bingiilar and plural, is s:)inctiiiii's imeil as an ndvorbial accusative with intransitive verbs, as : dihr riroiioun, though thf'y^'eneridlv govern another case or take a j)ie})()sition, as : hoc shuht ininm, tliis aU)ne he pui'sues, for- sfmleo otlierwise takes the (hitive ; so also : Il/iiil tihi a-isnifior. In that I npree with you. Quae homhir^ arniif, pnrif/nnt, 'Wlmfever tliinf,'s men plough, anlifranl, rift nti omnia parent. wail, or huild" all are subject to virtue. Transitive verbs do the same, so tluit tliey may have two accusatives, as : Hoc 1e moneo. lilud te. hortor. This I advise you. To that I e.. lort you. (5.) There are five impersonal vei-bs expre.ssive of certain feeling--' wliicli govern the accusative of the i)erson in whom t!je feeling exists, and the genitive or tlie infinitive of the thing which causes the feeling. These are piget me, it grieves me or 1 grieve ; pndet me, I am ashamed ; taedet me, I am wearied ; poenifet me, 1 repent ; miseret me, I pity, as : Phiet vie stiiJ tU'iae meae. Pndet viefacli. 31 is'-ret 7)ie liujus homiiiis. Pvdel me covjileri. Taedet me enumerate. I am grieved at my folly. I am ashamed of the deed. I pity this man. I am asliamed to confess. I am wearied to enumerate. In like manner the impersonals decet, it is becoming, dedecet, it is not becoming, latet, it is hidden from, take the accusative of the jterson to whom anything is or is not becoming, and from whom anything is hidden • but the thing is expressed either by the infinitive or the nominative THE ACCU8ATIVK. i3y as oho odorem to (lance tlio Hi) miliar urn, to nnil plural, is ive verli.s, us : utter a liarsh U'i, to rejoice their object ey ^'eueriilly : hoc ithidtt B takes the you. noil plough, ftre subject f have two of certain 1 in -whom ive of the i(/et me, it led ; taedet 'eret me, I ly. sed. ss. :rate. becoming, Vom, take or is not ; but the omiiiative of a mihstantive which are thus virtually the subjects of the inijiersoiiiil verbs, us : dfcet, It is licit at all beccniinpnn orator to 1)0 aiigiy, but ti) Hiuiulate (nnj,T.i) u itot uiibciMiuiiiijj;. Savage anger is bccouung to wild beustH. ."f Orulnrfm irairi vwume siiHuliire nvn drdrcfi. Trux deret irnftraa. NoTK. -• All tlii'Ho imiier.ionnl verbs sometimes have a neuter pronoun for tni ir Mulijeet, HH : lUiit jimhC tt f nikit /.otniut luiii ; id iiii'.iiii,( ihcit. ^143. (1.) Some verbs have adoubleobjectjUiuluocordingiy g(i\ttni two accusativt's. Tlius doceo, 1 teach (also drdvceo uii'l f'doer.o), and ado, I liide or conceal fioiii, have oiic accuHalivo of tin; i-cihou and another of the thing, as : Quid nunc te lilleraa doce.arn i Why sliould I now tcacli you the leUers ". Jler ornnen celat. He conoeals his journey from ail. When these verbs are changed into the passive, the accusative of the thing remains, as : Cirero pur ItuatoH cuncta edodus est. Cicero was informed of everything by the t-nibassadors. NoTK 1. — InHtend of the accusiiHve of -• - ..uLL.^^::;; (■"..) The active of the coinilMtive verbs mentioned in S 133 and f^i^miym'^ to u.ake, to name, to appoint, re-ard', le inado Ancns Marciua SeuaUt, CatUinam hfistcmjudkarlt. The's^nato declared Catihno an enemy. N'oTr;.-Verb<. componn.Iod with chrnm .nnd tram may h'lve two § 144. Motion towards a place or person is generally ex pre.ssod by the accus. tive with a propositi .n. The only ea- rn which It IS expressed by the accusative alone is that of tla- names ot towns and small islands, as : liomnm jyrrtfpchia est. Athenas ndrfjiif.. Legatos minit Tarentum. He is p(me to Rome. He arrived at Athens. Ht! sent ambassadors to Tarentum. The words domus, house, and r».., the country, are like- wise put in the accu,sative to denote motion to, as : Redeo domum. lius ibo. I return home. I shall go into the country. ..^S^:i;t^:^^^^;,- -i- r-'StiSii^i^ tx:',!i THE ACCirsATlVE. 141 y Iiave a. sltnihr Mnisiitivo of tho ned in tho rul<>, noun. n.(1 before it, an: C'aosiir led liin prU'.\^i(Ua (or ''Urn round all uion of course ns exercitui enerally ex- le only ca- I that of the io Tarentiim. Y, are like- ntry, nd employ it ito Italy, for When tho riaTue of a town or island is accompanied by """'' '" " '■ '" ' ' " " 'yea, in Italiam rt-nit. le words uvba, oppu/um, luxula, the usunl i)repo«itions inuNt be eninlove u.s pcrienxt in urhem At/wnan, hu anivcil in thu city of Athens. NoTK 2. In Kngli.sh wc Honietinies si.y "at" or "in n town," where in Latin the idea of nioLion contained in tho verb ro.iiiirt.'H the iiccus,.tivo as: Itonaia cu,v'e>in-in>U,v adrcuerinif, they met or arrived at Konie : he went to Iheniutoclos at Athens, profcdua td Athenan ad TlumUtodcm. J; 145. The aooii.sative without a preposition i.s u.st'd both with verbs ami adjectivcvs to expivss duration of tine and extension of space in answer to i\w questions Ifow hjng? how fur ] how high ? how low 1 how deep ? how broad ^ e.y.: Litacinia totam/m iwclem canit. Tho ni;,ditin;,'ale sings aluiost the ,_ . . whole niglit. I Via decern unuM oppuijiuita fst. Tn.y was iiesieged for ten years. Irabeaiiitf.rsehimaped-sdidnhaiit. 'i'lie beams were threo feet apart ,, . frmn one another. /iamt qmnque dierum iter a Cur- Zama i.s live ja. A trench three hundred feet long. The participle nntm (born) take.3 the accusative of the time that a person has been born- that „ de.scribin» his age, as : o Decfm aunns mitm eat He ia ton years old. ' yrus ,inln unnos)uitHs rc'j- Cyrus began to reim at the a^e nare a^epit. oi fortv. ° NoTKl. —Duration of time i,^ -^oinetlmes expressed by the preposition {'.'■'■ ■*■;"" *"^' accusative, especi:, ly when it i.s to be intimate.l that the tune IS a long one, as prr drr, ,n aintox, for ton long yeiir.s. Sometimes ■ luratioii of tnue is expre.>.=.ed by the ablative, cither with or without a preposition, as piKjnnt,,,,, ,-,>•< hnris quimpie, fighting was going on for five hours Ihe verb.s ahtssc and distarc (to be distant) alw s,.n;otimes take the ablative, as : bidui spatio ahcram ah «>, I was a two day.s' march •listant from hii- ; Ariovisti cnpiac a nuxtrix miUbu.i passuum (iiiufaor et rmnti aberant, ttie forces of Ariovistus were 24,000 paces distant from our Note 2. --In anwer to the question "for how long a time?" we must use til with the accusative, as: hidutias in (rii/inta anno.-i impdraverufd, tlwy obtained a truce for thirty years ; in mvltus antws, for many years, ilence in omnt tempos, for all time ; in pmeseuH tc.iijms, for the present • in posterum, for the future ; in diem, in horani virn-t, to live (only) for the 'lay, for the hour; in dies, from day to day, i.e., daily. a irlU. In some cases the accusative is used adverbially especially in the following phrases : mwjnam partem, to a great extant; vutxlmam partem, for the most part ; victm patris, in place of or on account of *-.\ « K* ^ . I 142 LATIN GRAMMAR. |4? ■, Ji In 'It / w ■ t;!' 1(1.' m en., of that kin.l. Of the san,e kind are the exp'res- sions c.terum &nd aUrra, as to the rest, however; quod si, if in this respect ; quid ? wliy ? and some others. «nf}t'^\^"''*^''"f,*'''^'*^ reference or limitation is used with verbs or an attribute is limited, as : Struck in front of the thigh. Ictm aili-ersum femur. Ot; /iHmero.-:qiie deo aimlia. ''Saucius pedes. Like a g id in face and shoulders. Wounded in the feet. .v.!^?l?"7'''^'-~ "^^ °^ *^® accusative is almost confined to poetry : in prose %ibu^ " "" "°'' '°"''"""' ^' '■ "•' '^''"^'^'ime deo "limili'; sJucTul, .JthT^ "T-^ *.^° accusative may be regarded as the object of the verb which IS usoJ in the sense of the Greek middle voice, describing a person 'ZlTa'^fh^l.'V' f^':,!>i«>-lf. as: Dido Sidoniam cAS/rfei^fcT ^;m.yai;a-that is, quae sibi circumdederat ; pueri laevo suspe si locvlo^ UH.r,rJT''"' ''VV''^ *^^'" '^''^'^' ^"^^ tablet fastened othS; ^fl/lTiV^ '*"• ,""'"\'^^-' 1^« puts on a helmet; Friamua ferrum '.iiKjUur, Pnam girds on his sword. §143. The accusative with or without an interjection is used m exclamations about a person or a thing ; the name ot the person or thing in this case is always accompanied by some attributive adjective or other attribute, as : Me mUerum or heu me miseruvi I Wretched man that I am ' OjaUaeew honunum spem ! Oh. the deceitful hope of men ! I o deorum utque kommum fidem I In the name of gods and men • IJuuCiue /wm>uem ! Call this a human beinc» ! Note 1.— The accusative in these exclamations probably depends unon 8ome verb understood, such as "look at' or "behold " '^^P'''*''^ "P°" ^v•lSlf^^",;p!:?'''!!'■l^•'''*>^ carefully distinguished from the vocative by ^vUlUl a person or thing is addressed. Instead of the accusative the •ithcrthrn ':n^nt^.'-r?^' '^ *V ^-r^^o^nP-nying adjective^ a iSica : '..ither than an attribute, as calamitosus neiotarus oui a suis a,;;j.'ions of asfcouishmeiit and indigna- tion, as : hie mihiquisijuavi mistricordiam noninat I let any one here talk to me of pity ; quid mihi Cclsus agit ? what is friend Celsus doing? quid hoc aibi vult '! what does this mean ? quid tibi via ( what do you want ? V -• <«l ♦,■« 114 LATIN GRAMMAR. ill; if It i '4' (2.) The verb esse, when it denotes possession fitrued with the dative. In Euitlish iH con- have," as we use the verb "to 1 jf,u est amicus. l have a frioud. Jiluext amiciiK Thou hast a friend, V/' '" •'««' "Wi'CJ- We have frienda. loH.i sunt amici. You have friends. Jthi cum eo muijna familiaritax You have gioat iutiuiacy with ,*'*'•. him. I atn est domm. The father has a house. J/i/u eat itijusta jioverca. I have an unjust step-mother. NoTEl.~£'^-s« in this sense is also coastiued with the genitive, but there is a shght dillerenoe in nunvnin-, for in domus est patrL the Sir^^ "" ""*' ^^*^'"***'' ^^ ^"'"^^ «'«' P^^^^^' tl»e emphasis is on ,,,^^Z^i?''~~^'^l the phrase mihi vomen est, my name is, the name itself •nay e thor be treated as the subject and put in the nominative, or be re- garded as s,;.uidi!ig m apposition to mihi, as mihi unwni estJulim, ov i.,.'avomcutstJuho. We rarely find mihi nomai ed Jvlii. Hence ei ti.vo nomen fuit Androclui or Androclo, that slave was called Androclus. (3.) Many verbs, most of which are in English transitive, a:e m Latin intransitive and govern tlie dative, e.rj. : Svhvmio, succurro, auxUior, I assist. Iiesisto, adocrsor, obnitor, renitor, repugno, obmtn, I resist or o|)|iose. /'\uvo, indulijeo, studeo, I favour, am devoted to, study, Imiidco, aemulor, I envy, emulate. IHaceo, arrideo, please, smile upon. Ptircu, obedio, obtempero, I obey. Serv'iu, jirosam, I serve, am useful to. Credo, Jido, conjido, diffido, I believe, trust, distrust. Pareu, tempera, I spare, refrain from, Suadeo, permadeo, I advise, persuade. Adulor, assentior, blandior, I flatter. Medeor, mcdicor, I cure, I(/nosco, I pardon. Gratulor, I congratulate, Maledko, obtrecto, convicior, I revile, Ira^cor, succenseo, I am angry. Patrocinor, I protect. Imperu, imperiio, ptutcipiu, dominor, moderor, tempera, I command. THE DATIVE. 145 Iv. jn, K con- verb "to imacy with le. ■mother. enitive, but It patri, the phiisis is on ? name itself ve, or be re- d Julius, or Hence, ei Androclns. ransitive, I, I resist study. list. impero, I m .Note 1.— These verbs have, of course, only an impersonal passive, as : mihi tnv,delur, I am envied; vohis invidctiir. you are envied; mihiprr- suasum est, I am persuaded; ml/n persuaderi vnnquam potuit, I could never be persuaded. Compare § 12;J. ^ , "u. Note 2.-Invideo may have an accusative of the thiii'' for which vou envy a person as: xnvideo (M honorem ; but it is more common to say tnvidco homori tuo. •' Note •i.—Mcdfnr&m\ mcdicor are sometimes construed with the nccusa tive. and amw/or always, when it signifies " I rival." Domimr, modevor &m\^tempero are found even oftoner with tlie accusative than with the (4.) Some verbs have a different meaning according as thev are construed with the dative or accusative, as : Cave.o canem or a cane. Caveo tibi, Cousulo mag'istrurt^ Conmlo marfistro Conmilo crvdeliter m marfistnim or df mn(fis(ro. Me.tuo and timeo alifpiem. Mrtuo and thni-o alicin or rfe aliqvo. (fonveiiio durem, Conveni' m'lhi tecum, Moderor mm. Moderor linf/une. Tompero rnn. Tempero soc'dii. Tempevo a lacrimis, Prospicio and prorideo alitiuid. Frospich and providm nlirui. I am on my guard against a dog. I am security to you I consult the ma.stor. I give advice to the master, take care of the master. I act cruelly to the master. I fear some one. 1 fear for some one. 1 meet the general. I agree with you. I manage, conduct a thing. I moderate my tongue. 1 moderate, regulate a thing. I spare the allies. I abstain from tears. I foresee or provide a thing. 1 take care or provide for some one. § 150. Many verbs compounded with the prrpositious ante, post, prae, ad, inter, in, ob, sub, and super, govern a dative ; and when their meaning is transitive, may have an accusative besides, as : Amicitiam omnibus rebmantqiono. 1 place friendship before all tr •!. things. Hannibal Alexandra posfponendus Hannibal is not to J)o regarded „"""*•''■'•.,., . , , asinferior to Alexander.'' Jionestas utditati prafferenda est. Honourable conduct is to be „, ., ., preferred to utility. t'elopidas omnibus pericul'is adfuif. Pelopidaa was present in all the dangers. Anatides interfuit pngnae navali. Aristides took part in the naval battle k<; ■J.' ■5' .;Ti>l it *;■«■, M»!.i ^ t ir ^ii ^K^'' 1 ^^^Br < ) 1 ^^^^^K '} 146 , LATIN ORAMMAR Legatus praeerat exercitui. Legatum prae/ecit exercitui. Pyrrhus Bomanls bellum intulit. Succubuit oneri. A lieutenant was at the head of the army. He put a lieutenant at the head of the army. Pyrrhus made war upon the Romans. He succumbed under the burden. Note 1. — Sometimes the preposition with which such a verb is com- pounded is repeated with its own case, especially when the idea of motion to a place is to bo specially set forth, as : totavi Ciliciam ad im- pei'ium adjunxit, he added the whole of Cilicia to the empire ; adhihere prudentiam ad onives res, to bring prudence to bear upon all things ; iiijecit se in mi Uos hostes, he threw himself into the midst of the enemies ; jw svf/jcctae sub ociilos, things brought under the eyes ; incumbere in ifladium, to fall upon the sword. This is the case especially with those verbs which are compounded with cum : thus comwirnico always repeats the cum, as hoc tecum communico, I communicate this to you. Verbs of excelling, as anteeo, antecedo, antecello, exeello, praesto, are conmionly -nnstrued with the dative ; but in later writers they take the accusative. Note 2. — Some verbs, as dono, circinndo, circumfundo, mperito, and induo, admit of two different constructions, without any difference in meaning, as : donare alicui civitatem or donare aliquem civitate, to give to some one the rig]i*s of a citizen ; wbi murum circumdare or urbem muro c'l'cum.dare, to surround the city with a wall ; aspergere lubem alicni or aliquem labe, to cast a slur upon some one ; Herculi Deianira tunicam or Herculem Deianira tinica induit, Deianira put a tunic on Hercules. § 151. A double dative is used with the verbs esse, fieri, dare, mittere, accipere, venire, relinquere, habere, tribuere, vertwp; ducere, and others. One of these datives is usually an ordinary dativus com modi, while the other signifies a purpose, intention, or result, as ; Haec res vobis exeinplo sit. Vobis honori et amicia utilitati estis. Cui bono f nit ? Alicui auxilio venire. Hoc mild crimini datur. Legionem castris pramdlo reliquit. Haec res mihi cordi or curat eat. Habere aliquem derisui. Let this thing be for an example to you. You are an honour to yourselves and an advantage to j'our friends. To whom was it any advantage ? To come to the assistance of somebody. This is imputed to me as a crime. He left a legion for a protection to the camp. This matter is a concern to me. To make a laughing stock of some one. THE DATIVE. 147 bhe head of it the head (unded with as a crime. ♦i,r *"/ *<>™e-what similar sense poets sometimes use the dative in IhfJ °/ ^i,'*'" *°^ard8, instead of ad or m with the accusative, as : it oSr "^^* "^ *° ^^""^^^ ' ^''^^ ''«""'^«"«' «ent down into § 152. The dative is sometimes used with passive verbs to denote the agent by whom a thing is done, instead of the aWative with the preposition a or ab ; and with the gerun- dive the dative is always used to denote the agent, as : Mihi (for a me) consilium captum est. Quidquid mihi (for o me) susceptum est. Cui (for a quo) non auditae sunt Istae orationes ? Barharus sum, quia non intelliqor ulli (for ab idlo). Hoc mihi (for a vie) faciendum est. Ratio nobis (for a nobis) reddenda est. The plan has been formed by me. Whatever has been undertaken by me. By whom have those speeches not been heard ? I am a barbarian, because I am understood by no one. This must be done by me. An account has to be given by us. Note. -Whenever any ambiguity arises from this use of the dative with the gerundive it must be avoided. In the t,entence ratio 7iobis red- instead^of ^ ^J"^^'^^"^ ™^^^* ^^' ^" account has to be rendered to us. §153. The impersonal verbs licet, it is allowed; libet, it pleases, and ex2)ed{t, it is expedient or useful, govern the dative of the person to whom anything is allowed, pleasinr us LATIN GRAMMAR. and (lat've have generally been made to do duty for the locative, whence Karthagine us well as Karthatjiiu. The same locative is seen in such forms as domi, at home ; ruri, in the country; humi, on the ground; domi wilitincquc, in peace and in war; and in some adverbs of place, as : hi-c, here ; ihi, there ; ubi, whore, &c. Note 2. — Domi remains the same when joined by possessive pronouns, as : domi meae, at my house ; domi tuar, at thy house ; domi nostrae, in our house. But when joined by any other adjective or a genitive of a sub- stantive, we must say in domo, as . in domo privata, in a private house ; in domo Ciccronis, in the house of Cicero. Note 3. — When the name of a town has a qualifying adjective, the ablative must be used with or without the preposition in, as ipmlioma, or in ipsa Roma, in Rome itself. When the name of a tovm or island is accompanied by the words iirhs, oppidam, or insula, these words are put in the ablative with or without the preposition in, as cam essnm Athcnia, {in) urbe celeberrima, when I was at Athens, a most famous city. CHAPTER XXXVIII. THE GENITIVE. A. The Genitive governed by Substantives. »«^,' ift IS §155. The most common function of the genitive is to express that I'ehttion between two substantives in which they conjointly designate only one thing, and the one in the genitive is equivalent to an attributive adjective, as : The king's house, or the royal house. The hostile .army. The title of kins;. The reward of fame (fame itself being the reward). Domus regis- [domva regia). HoMiiim (hoxtUes) exercitux, Nomen regis {rcgium). Mercedem yloriae. Note 1. — The very name gonitive, properly genetive (from gfiuna), indi- cates that this case defines the genus or species to which anything belongs. Thus when I say liber fratris, the y/orA fratris defines the book of which I am speaking, and distinguishes it from other books. But the genitive may yet stand in different relations to the substantive by which it is governed ; it may stand to it in the relation of an attribute, as in domus regis, or in an appositional relation, .as in vomen regis ; vox voln))fatis, the word pleasure ; rerbum manendi, the word to advise ; remedium ignis, the remedy of fire (where fire is the remedy. ) NoTf! 2. — When a substantive derived from a transitive verb has a %V THE GENITIVE. 149 tive, whence seen in such the ground ; rbs of place, ve pronouns, li nostrae, in itive of a sub- ivate house ; rljective. the psaRonui, or or island is orda are put isf.m Athenis, ity. 5. litive is to in which one in the IS : r the royal (fame itself qenua), inJi- liing belongs. 3k of which I genitive may ; is governed ; s rcfiis, or in is, the word l •,. Hi -i.<^-- ' * ' 1 ' «;1 ■f 150 LATIN GRAMMAR. I i I • t I Note 1.— When the partitive nature is not to be expressed, we must say tantus labor, and not tantum lahoris ; so also id negotium, muUimilites, ducenti militcs. Adjectives of the third declension are scarcely ever used in the partitive genitive, hence : aliquid duke (not dulcis), something sweet ; nihil suave (not sua vis), nothing pleasant. Note 2. —A partitive genitive is also governed by adverbs of quantity, place, and time, as : satis (enough), parum (too little), abunde and affatim (abundantly), iiimis and nimiuvi (too much). To these also belong several pronominal adverbs, hie (here), hue, eo (thitb<^r), ibi (there), ubi (where), Miicwni/Me (wherever), and a few others, as : saus pecuniae, enough money; pa;ni7n tempm'is, too little time ; nimium laboris, too much labour ; hie loci, in this place ; hue or eo dementiae, to that pitch of madness ; ubi terrarum t where on earth ? u'neunque te^Tarum, wherever on earth ; quoad ejus fieri potest, as far as this can be done. Note 3.— Instead of a pnrtitive genitive, we often find the prepositions ex, de, inter, or in, as : rnulti de or e civibtis, many of the citizens ; aliquis de militibus, some one of the soldiers ; pajici inter cives, few of or among the citizens. The genitives of the personal pronouns nostrum and vestrum are used only in a partitive sense, as : mtdti nostrum, many of us ; pauci yestrum, few of you. Compare § 54, note 1. Mille, which' is properly an indeclinable adjective, is sometimes found with a partitive genitive, as niille militum, one thousand of the soldiers. § 157. A substantive accompanied by an adjective, de- scribing the quality of a person or thing, is put in the geni- tive (the genitive of quality), as : Vh marim inoeini. A man of great talent. Eiium mirae matjnitudlnis. A horse of wonderful size. Hex miujni laboris. A thing of great labour. ClatoiiH miUe et ducentarum navium. A fleet of 1,200 ships. Vir ordiuis senatoru. A man of senatorial rank. Homo summae audaciae. A person of the greatest audacity. Note 1.— The genitive of quality can never be used, unless the sub- stantive is accompanied by an adjective. We e.iunot therefore say in Latin, as in English, a man of talent, a man of power ; hut in.stead of such genitives we must apply the adjectives talented and powerful. Note 2.— A genitive of quality implies that the quality is inherent and abiding, and not manifested only in certain circumstances; in this latter sense the ablative of quality is more appropriate. Note 3.— Sometimes an adverbial accusative is used instead of the genitive of quality, as : homines id aetatis, men of that age ; oratio aut aliquid id genus, a speech or something of that kind ; alia id genus, other things of that kind. § 158. A predicative genitive is governed by esse and fieri, and denotes possession or duty, as : Domua est regis. The house is the king's, belonga to the king. THE GENITIVE 151 id, we must nuUi militea, y ever used something )f quantity, and affatim long several ihi (where), igh money ; ur ; hie loci, i terrarum f id ejus fieri prepositions ius ; aliquis f or among ind vestrum f us ; pauci properly an genitive, as tive, de- the geni- iize. r. Ilk. t audacity. ss the sub- fore say in ead of such is inherent !es; in this ead of the oratio aut lenus, other esse and 's, belongs Confiteor me nulliua conailii/uisse. Maximus honor Spartae seiium fuit. Omnia virifiunt, Thebat populi Romani factae »unt. I confess that I did not possess any wis(h)m. The greatest honour belonged at Sparta to o'd men. Ail tilings come to belong to the man. Thebes was made to belong to the Roman people. Note 1.— The words signifying part or duty (munm, officiam, pro- fmum) are frequently omitted with cm, so that the genitive appears to be dependent on the verb esse, as : est adohscentiH wajons nata vcrcri, it is the duty of a young man to respect older persons ; cujiisvis homiiiis ext irrare Tt IS the nature of every man to err; illud pusil/i uiiiini est, that is the part or sign of a mean spirit ; tempm-i cedere sapientis est, it is the part of a wise man to yield to circumstances. Note 2.- WTien possession is expressed by a personal pronoun it must be changed into the possessive, as : haec domus est mea, this house beloiiL's to me, or is mine. The predicative use of the possessive i)roiiouns is most freciuent, when the subject is an infinitive, as : tii.ani tst jmrenlis ruln-e W 18 your duty to honour your jiarents ; inimn est cousiifcre, vestrum /ortiter puynare, it is my part to form the plan yours to fight bravely. . § 159. The substantives causa and gratia (for the sake of), and instar (after the likeness, like), wliich have ahncst as- sunied the character of prepositions, are placed after tlie genitive, which they govern, as : Mundvadeorum hominuhique. cuusa The world has been made for the /actus est. Hake of gods and men. Fatns Viet causa. For the .sake of my father. Epktola volumiuia instar erat. The letter was like a volume. Note.— For my sake, thy sake, &c., is expressed by med causa ; tua, sua, nostra, vestra causa. » > i B. The Genitive with Adjectives. §160. Many adjectives expressing capacity, desire, ex- perience, fulness, remembering, forgetting, and requiring a substantive as a complement to their meaning, take that substantive in the genitive. The genitive itself is sometimes of an objective and sometimes of a partitive nature. Such adjectives are : Avidus, covetous, Studioans, fond, Plenus, full, Coiiscius, conscious, Cupidus, eager, Inscius, nescius, ignorant. >/ M ••' . , 152 LATIN GRAMMAR. 1)? Pi t I,, SI ^11 > :M :li Compos, master of, Tnops, Weak, Fote-iis, powerful, Iiiip'jtens, not jiowerful. I HSU I' I Its, miaccustomed. ProviJus, foreseeing, Verres waa eager for money. A ijer.son eager for revo\ition. Peritus, skilled, Imperitus, unskilled, Me/nor, mindful, remembering, Iinnicmor, uninindfiil, • Partlceps, partakini,', Expers, exsors, not sharing, and some others ; as : Ven'ea cvpidaa fuH pecuniae, Howo cHju'/iis renim voranrm. „ ^,.,.,... ^^.^^. .„, .^v.uv ....... Oiiiumm i/oitrttiarim ntudiu.-utivos. NoTK :i.— The i-rcsent participles of transitive verbs, when used as adjectives, have their object in the ^onitive ; but when thoy are real parhcij.les they retain their object in tbr accusative. Thus ,inha laborum patuag IS a soldier cajiaWe of enduring hardships, whereas lahuvcs miUns IS one who is actually enduriny bardsliips. § 161. Some adjectiN-e.s are construed either with the genitive or dative iudisoriminatcly, though sometimes with a slight difference of meaning. Such adjectives are : Par, equal, a match for, Iinpar, unequal, iSinii/ui, similar, like, Dissiinilis, unlike, Aequalls, equal iu age. Par ceteris, or par ceterorinii. Tempi iim sacrum del or deo. Snpei-atrt! jHUris or /xUri. Cojitrarms, contiary, Proprius, belonging to. Communis, conuuon, Sacer, sacred, Superstes, surviving — e. g. Equal to the rest. A temple sacred to the go-i. Surviving hia father. Note l.—5't»n7i.i and diasimilis, when expressing resemblance in out- TUE GENITIVJB. 153 ward appfarjincn, are generally construed with the dative • but wh«n d* not.ng r..»en. blnncc; n ,l,aracter. they take ^.ho gcMUt^TveJLS c« JATmi/i « luj„, 1.0 (log in like tho wolf (in ui>peara,.ce) ;Cramis Alexa"drilZl^ mevolau, ihuHnm wanted to be like Alexander (a. a Ln.fuSr) NoTK 2.-Sonio adjectives which, from their nioaninK mi"ht sPPm ♦,. fal under thcHeruleH. nevertheless govern tho mZ^o In r fa]n a'^^ra^kndU'.rrbla'trr'"'''"'!"^"*'^ ''^^^^'-^^^ -^^^ «'« P^«I-i"on 0U8 of the nee in out- C. The Genitive with Verba, §162. Verbs of lembering, geucmlly govern iin objective tre rermnwcor, recordor, I remember; oblivisror, I for-et • aUihuiieo, comviorteu, I remind e. ^. ** ' AnhnuH inemiuU prae.teritorum, liimiiil>'r.i,r vitn-iH amtcUiae. Ohlir'invor J:))iruri. AUitionuit vie benejicii tui. The mind remembers past things. I remember the old friendship. I forget I'^pieurus. He roniiuded me of your act of kindness. thJ^ .fat vfi w?fS ,/. "V""/'"'e are also construe.! with the accusative, or ,.roi o m „M . /.^ t/e- the former when the thing is expressed by a neuter pioi.oun, an : hoc te admoneo, I remind you of this : de Irotlio vo^ad, miui a Lfronu ttc s'l"l" Vi'"'"""' y""- '^1'°^^ «f remenl^ring and foJ^rt^'g of a th L 1 , ." " '*9'="«''tive, especially when the object i« tht na e saino"Z'^tnw.H '•'^""'<""«^ expressed by ndhi venit in mentem with the ff/i/u i(t w,«i^m /,(';«« m, I remember this thing i? 163. .Some verbs exj)ressing tJie feelings of pity, shame regie , ami dlSSUSt, have the person or Thing ealLg f^rth the.se leehngH in tho genitive. Such verbs are : vdsereor and mim',sco, 1 ,„ty ; and the imj,e7-sonals miseret, mierescit, and mmrelur me, 1 pity ; pujet me, it vexes me ; poemtet me. I repent • pudet est, 1 me, I am ashamed \ iacdet »ifi , 1 am wcjuried or disgusted— e. y. or 2^crta£Sii}rt il mrere met. Pity ma U I •- H\ 164 LATIN GRAMMAR. A' . w '?i^. ;«. ' f h r A^'. ^ ♦>■" • s?', .•) r- *i " 1 •i [•••. ;''^ • / 1 ^:l i: 1- ^. *' p <> II n' ■' .J Pi. ^< )MC ver/lifj^ntiae meae. I am ashamed of my negligence. Afiaereor (or vmerft me) amid met. I pity my friend. Poen let me peccati. I repent of my mistake. NOTR. -When tlie thing c.illing forth the feelings implied in these im- personals is expressed by a verb, we may use either the infinitive or the conjunction quod, as non pomitet me vixisse or quod vixi. Pertaesm (disgusted witli) genorally takes the accusative, pertaeaut ignaviam twim. §164. The judicial verlis of accusing {accjiso, arguo, insiinu/o), convicting (convinco, coarguo), condemning {(/cmno, condoiDto). and acquitting {absolvo, libera), and a few others, take the Hub.stantive naming the cUcnce or punishment in tlie genitive — e. g. : Ne7no anteaclartan rernmaccuwtur. Let no one be accused of his past actions. Fannius Verrem insiinu^at avaritiae Fannius accuses Verres of avarice ft audaciae. and audacity. Alhiunn .scelerls arguer: To charge one with a crime. Furli daviiKxtm est. He was condemned for theft. ^'HJl^|ent^ae convictus est. He was convicted of negligence. Capitii da7nna(u8. Condemned to death, Note 1. —The verbs of condemning and acciuitting sometimes have the name of the oltence, and especially that of the punishment, in the ablative, wind) is always tlie ^^ ise if the punishment is a fine. Hence we can say ciipitc aliqiuiii dammire, as well as capitis. The ablative with de is par- ticularly coiuiuon with the verbs poatidare and reumfacere (to accuse), as : pndulare aliqium r/petundariun or de repetundia, to accuse one of extor- tion ; de vi, of violence. Note 2.— A few adjectives similar in meaning to the above verbs, such as reus, noxius, innoxiua, insonx, mnnifestua, and compcrtus, are likewise construed with the genitive of the offence. § 165. Verbs of buying, selling, and valuing— as : emo, I buy ; vendo, I sell ; veiieo, I am sold ; sto, comto, sum, I cost ; 2^'rosto, liceo, I am for sale ; conduco, I hire ; loco, colloco, I let ; aestimo, puto, duco, habeo, pendo, facia, I value or tax — govern the genitive of the price or value, when it is^ expressed in a general way by tanti, quanti, magni, jxirvi, rninorif), plurimi, mascimi, or minimi — e.g. . Auctoritatem tuam mmjni aestimo. Aliquid pliiris patare. Emit Caitius hartos tanti, quanti Pytkius voluit. Vendo tneumfrumentum pluris, I value your authority high!}-. To value something more highly. Canius bought the gardens at the price which I'ythius wished. I sell my corn at a higher price. THE GENITIVE. 160 But when a detinite price is mentioned, the ablati^ e must be used, as : /tocrateavemlhiUummorationemhocrAti'H sold ono speech for ViyxuU talentis. twenty talcuta. ^ §166. Tho impersonal verbs interest and refert (it is of interest or nnportancc) take the per.son to wlioin anytliinff is of interest m the genitive ; but whev the | erson is expressed in Enghsh by a {.ersunal prono.n, tli.. Latins use the possessive forms meCi, tuCi, sua, noa, rii mstra -e.g. : Interest omnium rectefacere. Interest reipitblicae. Ctodii inttrcrat Milonem perire. Med refert. NilM titd referebal. It IS >' ; uteri ,., to all to act right , It is of Interest to the state. It was of iiiiiHirtaiice to t.'loJius that iMilo slioiilil perish. It is of interest to mc. It was of no interest to you. wiM.^lL,^'"^'^''"' *' ''^'■^^y '«»nd with a genitive, and more frcMuentlv with tlic possessive pronouns. wi.4ueiiny Note 2. -The degree in which anything is of interest is expresHrd by adverbs as iV(W., maunopere, uuilUu,,, pins, tantvm, 7«^»,^/«^ or by t ^^ genitives of price, innnni, parri, ,jua,ui, plaris. Tie thing in re-'ard to which any tiling ,s of interest is expressed by ad witli the acfnsative. Note ;H. The thing which is of interest is never expressed by a substan- tive, but either by an inttnitive, or by a clause beginning wi li „^" Tor by an interrogative clause. Sometimes the thing%f interest isexpres'sed by a neuter pronoun as: hoc intcressc arhUrnr^ I believe this to be o ntenst ; nihd vitev,,t, quo modo hoc fiat, it is of no importance how thk iLu"w sU'you!"' '"'"■"' *" "' '''"""^ '' '' "^ Sieat /inportance that I D. Freer Use of the Ge,ritive. K fi ^^^A ^"''u^ *"1 ^^*? writers make a very free use of the genitive both with verbs and adjectives, as : Sceleris pur us. So/uttis operum. Desine querelarum, FeJix cerebri. NotUH paterni nnimi. Modicus vutvptatia, Atrox odii. Free from guilt. Released from work. Cease from complaints. Lucky in regard to the brain. Known for fatherly affection. Moderate in pleasure. Savage in hatred. f.^^fJ^'T;^!^""' " ^o^'^t'n'.es "sed in the sense of a locative (like domi) for the ablative, as: m,cior animi, I am tortured in mind: pmdeo ammi, I am in a state of mental suspense. />"t«eo M 156 LATIN QRAMUAR. CHAPTER XXXIX. if.' \¥ it :»,t I 111 1 4' I ^h IB ^ 1 1 S|: ; ^M 'i'^ ^^^^^^Bi i '■' ^ ^^^^m ' '' ^• HHi ji ^^■Q|a|JJ (, THE ABLATIVE. § 168. The ablative expresses a variety of adverbial rela- tions which are indicated in English by the prepositions /rom, by, with, in, or at. The chief ideas expressed by the abhitive are those of separation and origin, phice where, and those of cause, manner, and instrument. The ablative is used sometimes with, and sometimes without, a preposition. Note. -The reason why the ablative expresses such a variety of A. ^ hlative of Separation. g 169. Se])aration from a person or thing seems to be the proper and original meaning of the ablative. It is used (witli and without the prepositions a or ah, ex, de) with the Vf!rl)s ceJo, poAlo, arceo, prohiheo, salvo, libero, and many others compounded with the prepositions ab, ea;, de,dis-, andse-, e.^..- CederevHjrata patria or ex ingrata To withdraw from an ungrateful patua. country. LSratMs arcebat reditu or a reditu Brutus kept the tyrant from re- i;/ramm». turning /ix/>.^.n'«,,7,/^,„,/?„,7n^■(ore/«i6««. To expel one from the territory (iho ,e ah,tm,re (or a cibo). To abstain from food. ^ Uoios obsidwne hberat. He freos the Ubii from the block- Solvere ahqium legibUs. To exempt one from the laws. «,-!!r'^'^ ^■~ n "'"f* ^^ remarked in general that tho prepositions are used abktivp''?r'^ ^ ^vhan actual physical separation is to be expressed, and he ablative aK.ne when the verbs are used in a secondary or d> , al sense though this distinction is not always observed. /"«•"- ai sense, coSri^d wUWho' kT/''"''s''^'^^^^^^^ ^""''■'' ''"'1 ^''^^^< are generally fto remove oni f rnnf t •^^V-k'^I'"'^- ^'^ '°'"'' P^'^«««' «'^<='^ ^^ ™«^"-'' <'^''« Ire ne^or used. ^^^^' ""'''"■'' ''""^"' ^''"'' '"^^^'''' prepositions ul^rioVJ^f ^'''**'"^ "u?\ ':***'^ ""^ P^'^«'« ill wi»ich an action takes place as the place from which it proceeda, as: a t^o, in the rear; ab THE ABLATIVE. int from re- 157 § 170. The ablative alone is used with the verbs of de- priving and filling, such as : prlvare, spoUarc, nudare, orbare, /raudare, exutre, comjjlere, implere, explere, and with verbs denoting plenty, such as : abundare, Jlorere, vacare, carer- ngere, mdigere — e. g. : * Urbem omni commeatu privavit. Murus dffpnsorlhus nudatua. Exuere 'o.stem caatris. Sol terram Ivce compfet. Qalli equitatu abundant. Cura vacare. He deprived the city of all sup- plies. A wall denuded of its defenders. To deprive an enemy of his •:■ np. The sun fills the earth with light. The Gauls abound in cavalry. To be free from care. ^«!!?J^ ^■r"^',"'^'*^^^ *^® ablative alone is generally us^d with adjectives ?„r^^„ i^^'^^-lT ""le^^PtioVrom, ^s : lib%- cura, free from careTSr' ■expense: °^ ^'"■*"°' ' ^^* *^'° ''^'^ "^ omnisumptu, free from all th^2I^il'~^^^^-^ i^- s°"ietime3, and indigere frequently, construed with the genitive, as indtgeo tui comilii, I need your counsel. § 171. The expression opus est, there is need, takes the ablative of the thing needed, as : Opus mihi est Ubro. Opus mihi est iibris. I need a book. I want books. But opus inay also be treated as an indeclinable adjective in a predicative sense, as : Libri mihi opus sunt. I want books. mSel^^^rfl-t S"f- °''^''^ is expressed by a verb, the infinitive must be used, or the ablative of a past partic pie, as : id scirinon oousest It 18 not necessary that this should be k^own -mature facto om7Z it i's necessary to act speedily. Sometimes usus'est is usS L the seLe of opus est, and with the same construction. §172. The ablative of origin denotes that from which anything is made or originates, and is used sometimes with and sometimes without, a preposition. It is found most commonly with the participles natus, ortus, orinndus (spruncr Irora), gemtus, satus, editus, amtus (begotten)— «. g. : Mercurius Jove natus et Maia. Mercury born (or son) of Jupiter and Maia. *<•'■'■: 11 U ' I.' ' - MM ■' »H r f '■i' 5; ll «.' 158 LATIN GRAMMAR. E nobis nati liberi vocantur. lienibus or ex renibus laborare. Ex ainicis inimici exsistunt. Aeger erat vidneribus. Those bom of na are called our children. To suffer from the kidneys. Out of friends become enemies. He was suffering from his wounds. Origin is very frequently expressed by the preposition ex or de with all kinds of verbs. Note 1.— When the participles natus, ortus, and genitus, refer to the actual parents, they generally take the ablative alone, though even here we sometimes have the preposition ex or de. When a more remote origin is to be indicated, it is customary to use a preposition, as : plerique Belgae orh sunt a Germanis ; Cato Uticeiisis ortus a Censorino proavo. Note 2.— The verbs facers ind fieri, (to make something out ot some- thing) generally take the preposition ex ; but in the questions : What am I to do with you ? What is to become of you ? the ablative alone is usually employed, as : quid hoc hhmine faciam ? what am I to do with this man? but we also find qtiid de te futurum est / and quid huic homini fades f B. Ablative of Cause, Manner, and histrument. § 173. The ablative without a preposition is used with verbs and adjectives to indicate the cause from which anything arises, the manner in which anything happens, and the means or instrument by which anything is efiected e.g. He remained in the army from his love of fighting. I was not doing this from insolence. In that way you will not be able to attain it. He arranged the affairs of the state with the greatest fairness. Amove pugnandi in exercitu mansit. Hoc ego nonfach'bam insohntia. hta ratione tu id asseqiii nonpoterls. Rem puhlicam snmma aequitate conHtituit. Vinjh aliquem cnedSrf, Suevi lade atque pecrr vivunt. To scourge one with rods. The Suevi live on milk and cattle. (by means of) Note L— The student must carefully distinguish the means or instru- ment from_ the agent by whom, and the intermediate agent through whom anything is done, for while the instrument is expressed by the ablative alone, the agent is expressed by the ablative with the preposition a or ab, and the intermediate agent by per with the accusative, as mittitur tibi episto/a a patre per scrvum, the letter is sent to you by your father through a slave. Names of persons, however, may be expressed by the instrumental ablative, if they are treated or viewed as mere tools in the haruls of others, as Etruria.n barbaiis vcxavU, he hiirassed Etruria through barbarians. The student must further observe that the preposition with 13 rendered by cum only when it denotes company, and not when li .1 THE ABLATIVE. 159 re called our idneya. le enemies. a his wounds. sposition ex , refer to the :gh even here remote origin lerique Belgae ',V0. out ot some- 13 : What am one is usually ith this man? ii faciei f ment. with verbs X anything s, and the i—e.g. ! army from )m insolence, not be able fairs of the ;est fairness. 'ods. y means of) ns or instru- irough whom the ablative tion a or ab, mittitur tibi your father esued by the tools in the uria through preposition id not when it denotes the instrument, as venit cum gladio, he came with (havinc) a sword ; but tnterfecit earn gladio, he killed him with (by mians of) a Note 2.— A preventive cause is expressed by prae with the ablative as • tolem prae jaculoi-um multitudine non videbitis, yon will not see the' sun because of tlie multitude of missiles ; p^-ae gaudio uhi sUn Sc»l In spring In summer. In winter. In this year. In the day and in the night. Every fifth yet^r. Agamemnon vix decern annis mam Agamemnon with difficulty took ^«P'' '"•*"»• one city in ten years. ^ Note 1. -The substantives in the ablative rire generally nouns denotin.r time or parts of time, as in the above example! ; but 8onS.es names denoting events, implying the idea of time, are u«ed in the sanrmaTer as ■ adventu Caesans, on (at the time of) Caesar's arrival ; disce.m, ZS on the departure of the enemies; comifns centuriatis, in (It 2eSe 2 the assembly of the centuries ; Saturnalilms, at the Saturnalia -JS Perstco, in (the time of) the Persian war ; initio, in the beginning ' ?^^^*=.2- .-'''he preposition in is required to denote time when if a sinirl*. to be set forth emphatically, as : in eo bello Lysander interlicitur in (Lf I particular time of) that war Lysander is killedr/rL Kmo staTj habuerunt, they had three fixed days within a yelr;bi^indie twke in a day ; m tarn multis annis, within so many years of TL^p[hL°tri:l':i":l!,' '^^^^"^ » «°* - ^"ch the notion wordJe.p7.roV^«^F^^^^^^^ eiumiodv tem^re m circumstances of that kind ; in bello, in time's of war" ^n ea aetate, m the circumstance, of that time. In describing a perS 5V ^&h 'M 160 LATIN GRAMMAR. I'" L^^ I'd w ii*ii Is' V' .* !■ age the ablative alone may be used, as : primd adofcscentid, in early youth ; virih aetate, in the age of manhood. The phrase in tempore signi- fies "at tlie right time." ^V7o. The place where anything liappens or is clone is expressed by the ablative, .soiuefcinies with, and sometimes without a preposition. The abhitive alone is used — (1.) In the phrases dextra {sr. pnrfe), on the right hand ; laevct or sinUti-d, on the left hand ; terra inari/ne, by land and by sea. The word locn.i, also, when accompanie^l by an attributive adjective or pronoun, is generally in the ablative alone, as : //oc hco, Vlo loco. Mfihore loco. A Itiore loco. S210 loco (also in loco). Loco (also ill loco) parentis. In this, in that place. In a better place. In a higher place. In the right or proper place. In the place of a parent. The words pars, via, iter are used in the same way as locus, as JIac parte, Eddpm Via. lllo ilinere. In this side On or by the same road By that road, (2.) In all names of places which have the attribute roperty. St- ■ ^ >' T""™ " ■™l'stantive with an iittiibutive Fhnina exlmia pulchritudine. Corpus imisitntu magnitudine. Flumen dlfficili transitu. A woman of extraordinary beauty. A body of unusual size. A river ditllcult to cross. £iislssP35«s?3 §177. The ablative is used with comparatives quam with the nominative or accusative, as : tead of Nemo est miserior me {quam ego) Nemo fortinmlior est Lepido (quam Lepidus). Nihil est virtutc {quam virtus) aviahilius. Dnlabella tuo nihil scito mihi esse jucundins (for quam Dolabeltam). Nnm mittent hominem Servilio din- niorem ? No one is more wretched than I. No one is more fortunate than Ticpidus. Nothing is more loveable than virtue. Besure tliat nothing is more agree- '?'jle to me than your Dolabtdla. Will they send a man more worthy than Servilius ? Iphigenia, than whom nothing more beautiful ha.l l^n" " "m h tbti jcui- -jiuo opcreqmd potest esse praeclarius i what can be more siVlPuHivi' the gods, than which nothing more blessed can be thought of. u ti .*!►- n HP^ 162 LAITN GRAMMAR. t« It .1; 1- ^^^B^ ^-^ ' i I. i i >Tote3. — The ablatiif .i opinio) '^f spe, expectatio»e, aequo, justo, eni^. t'lHto are regularly joined to a comparative instead of qin'm, as: D/dnione. celerius, more quickly than was thought ; serins spc, later than was lioped ; phis aequo, more than is fair ; solUo magis, more hhan usual. So a,ho dicto citius, more quickly than the word is spoken. Note 4.— After the comparatives j.'us, mirun:, ■mplius, and lorf/ius, •when measures or numerical relations are mentioned, quam is frequeniiy omitted, without the noun followinj? being put in khe r' fative, .a : plus pars dimidia, more than one half; tecitin plus an:< 'i i,i vi si, 1 have lived vfith you more than a ymr; minus duo milia hominum, lesj than 2.000 man ; spativm non ampliug pedum sexcentorum, a space not ie'mo than i'>00 reet. § 178. Tb'j fj la j 'vo is also used with comparatives to ex- press the ajoour't of years after he had been ban; 1 ; hardly be fciuarked that and post are also used aa iii>;v*fvi the accusative without any aifference of meaning. veen wst Oo' is -0 post- t need uviis with THE ABLATIVE. 163 j'usta, end tiilito , as: opinio f!(, lan was Jioped ; So also riicto , and loi<;/ins, ', is freqiieiiily ative, .s : pkis , I have lived les'i tban 2.(k''0 moro than '>00 ttives to ex- s compared, feet higher ulto, paulo, of a compara- le, and some- ; by how much '.udine aliquem ':, you surpass 1 him by the re more com itium aberant, in a or ab, as vaa pitched at verbs, signify in ablative to another, as : after ; inultis e yerrs later, e, o'' veen >r t; iost ira' Of is erf ,0 post- t need '(jninAOitui with §179. Tie following nine deponent verbs and their com mwr, laetor, glorior, and dignor, as: '/ » Bene utitur armia et fmiio ti„ khii pace volunifZ ?i "'"' u ™' T "^ ^°''''' ''^"• Officio fungi. ^ 1^^°^« 7^« ^^-is'i to enjoy peace. A«c'l?| •■. H Hi LATIN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XL. [1 Vf* ■!■ 1*34 THK VOCATIVE. § 183. (1.) The vocative is used in addressing a person or thing, either with or without an interjection, the most com- mon interjection being o, as : Ettu BruteJ You too, Brutus ! jit, Pompei, mihi aderas / You, Poinpey, stood by me. ^m'en! _ ye gods above ! ^ u soror conjux, o femina sola my sister, my wife, thou only mperstes I surviving woman ! ♦,-v^^r"~7^^!-*''''*'''t™l''*^^''''''^f""y distinguished from the accusa- tive m exclamations about a person or tiling. See § 147. (2.) Instead of the vocative, the nominative is often used especially in poetry and early Latin, as : ' Audi tu, populus Alhanus. Vos, Popilius sanguis. Hear it, ye people of Alba. O ye of the blood of PompiUus. A noun in ap})osition to a vocative should of course be in the vocative, but it frequently appears in the nominative. CHAPTER XLI. ■!l. i% ADJECTIVES. § 184. It has already been stated that an adjective, whether used as an attribiite or as a predicate, must agree with the substantive to which It belongs or refers in gender, number, and case. See 8 135 and following. " ' Adjectives, generally in the plural, are frequently used as substantives in the masculine gender when they denote persons, and in the neuter when they denote things, as : Sapientes. Boni. Wise men. Good men. ADJECTIVES. person or aiost com- y me. ) thou only the accusa- 'ten used, ba. apiliua. be in the e. sther used ;antive to See § 135, used as ' denote as : Omnes boni. Multos ex suiii amiserunt. Omne bmium, Omne malum. Honesta. Turpia. 165 All good men. They lost many of their own men. livery good thing. Every evil. Honourable things. Disgraceful things' a-Sve, bu"t "tl^cTallySSlt/a"^^ °' ''""^^ '^"^^ -°ther omnes boni, omne maL mZMhTi^Zl^, pronoun. as an attribute, as : of adjectives used substant ve y we^"'?';/" »"l^-'»-"cJ noble. Instead an.l res bonae, vesdifficUesZoIthinTlw^'u-i : ''"'"""'•'or ririsapientes dative, and ablative pi ral^ofeut"^^ ""^^f '. •^"•' "' *'»-' S^"'*'^^. genders, it n>ight some fLs L doub f f w^fi" ""^ Bl'oken of, and in such cases ft is al™ ,1 Ji m"'! •'•"'''°'?'' ""^ t'»»g« ^^'e and res, unless the coiite^t dearlv InwV. . f^'"' *" "''^ *''« ^""'^^^ ''"'"ivcs an.l multis nnght mean of manv n, d to ,n '.' v '' ""''"*• '^'''"^' »^^^torum Verum for Veritas. Juslnm for juKtttla. Boncnttim for liovestas. Aequum for aequUas. Hence such adverbial expressions as The truth. Justice. Honourable conduct. Equity. Z>e inti'gro. Ex or rfe improviso. Afresh or anew. In an unforeseen manner. 186. Some adjectives denoting time nr nlonn where n Enirlish we en.nlov n . i 1 x- ^^^^^ ^''® ^^^^ In media aqua. Suvivia in arbore. Prima vocte. In I'xfrema q/iMoIa. Dedhnus iios totos philoaophias. In the midst of the water. On the top of the tree. In the first part of the night. In the last part of the letter. VVe devoted ourselves wholly philosophy. to '^^'^^STr^t^-X^^-^-^^^:^ u' < r ■.4\ \M 166 LATTN uaAMMAR, homo, adolescens, mulier, urbs, oppidum, (fee, to which an attribute may b( aiven — e, g. : Socrates, homo .sa/nVna. Alexander, adolescens nohilis. The wifl" Pof--' - Thf ; . Lo jfouiig Alexander. ?.i But when the attribute has become a surname, it is added at once to the ])roper name, as : Alexander Magnus, Sulla Felix, and in all oases where a man's native place is indicated by an adjcctJ> e, as Miltiades Atheniensis, Miltiades of Athens. NoTF.-Wlien a substantive has two attributes, they must be connected by e«, a^ , iiiany brave men, midii et fortes ciri ; but when the second adjective with ltd substantive exinesses only a single idea the et is omitted, as cotumnn u, rca solida, where columna aurea forms only one idea and receives th^ attribute solida, ' §188. The Latins frequently use rdjectives where in English we employ adverbs. Ii this case the adjective forms a kind of apposition to the substantive, describing the condition of the agent rather than the manner of the action as : Nattira tacUa jitdlcat. Nature judges tacitly. Imprmlens hoofed. I have done this impru^lently Multi eus quos vivos roluerunt Manv treat with insulin after murluos contimelia afficiunt. death those whom tiiey have honoured while tli v/ were alive. Adjectives of this kir^' are invHus, ur villing ; Inetus, joyful • lihcm g\a.(\; sciens, know ' ; m/. xdens, hu^.rxxAent ; i^iperitus, un- skilled ; so also doinesticus, at home ; malutinus, in the moniina • suliliinis, aloft. ° ' Note i.— The accusative singular or plural o' a neuter aii uctive i- 8onietin»es especially m poetry, ised as an adverb, as : dulce ridere, to smile sweetly ; turbidum laetari, to rejoice boisterouslv : acerba tucrl w look fiercely. ' Note 2.— Some adjectives are used as s^ii tantives, some substantive being understood, which determines the ir, as : patria (viz terra urbs, or ciintas), one's native country or c; cr ^eMia), a wild' beast • cam (capilh), gray hair ; dextra and lae> aai, . the right and left Hand; htbernu {castra), winter quarters; .utiva [atstra), a stationary camp ; praeiixta (toga), the toga praetexta ; friffida (aqua), cold water ai I Note 3.— When the neuter of a past participle is used substantively, tne qualitymg attribute is commonly expressed by an adverb, and not by an adjective, as .- bene jacium, a. good deed ; callide dictum, a curming ADJECTIVES. 16; Bii.il, fl f ^°°»P»5»^»ve ^>f an adjective or adverb often Bguihes that a quality exists in too high a degree-that is m a higher degree than usual, &a : Seneclmesinaturaloquacior. Old age is naturally rather ''"""^^- He lived rather freely or too freely. «.Sifi~"if ?'»*"*y *• described as existing in too high a desn-Ae for fcv i v!lr ''" "'jnibe"- of combatants. If the somethinK is exnressed §190. When two qualities existing in the same person or thing are compared with each other, either both adjectives are pu. m the comparative, or the comparative .f the first only 18 heat..! by w«^js,as: "^e nrst Bodiea rather large than strong. Corpora iiiurina magij quam Jirma. Oratio verh ^ ttm gratior. Note.- After a coj quam. About the oi. A speech more true than pleasing. ■ ative poets sometimes use atque or ac instead of n of quam after a oompaiutive, see § 176. §191. The superlative in Latin not only indicates the highest d. -M-ee almolutely, but also relatively, which we express ,n Jl^nglish by " very" with the positive/ whence vir Mtssimm may mean the bravest man, .n- a very brave man • Tl loTnT r' ] ^"^ ^''^ ^' ''• ^^^ ^^"*^^^* ^^-^y« «hows in Which of the two senses a superlative is to be imderstood. rorce as he can. Moni.linies the same is effected by the adilition of ,,,,,„ K„^^!^.^-/-J^':? '" English a superlative m the plural has the wo„l all »u ine wuest men j allimma quaequc Jlu,ahm, all the deepest rivers. A ^ »' ■. « I If 168 LATIN GKAMMAB. CHAPTEK XUI. PRONOUNS. li 4 ( 5e;/M»i, 7Mor/ C«e.- contra Gallog Jason navem aeiJificat, quae Arqo nominala est, tt in earn u^cendit. The war, which Caesar waced against the (iaiils. Jason built the ship, which was eaUfd Argo, uiul in it he embarked. § 193. In the personal pronouns, jrender cannot hf» ^,-« I invited you, but you did not come. We, \ve the cotisuIs are wantin<» lu douig our duty. ° not wishing to intrudo his omi er4n on t* ^n^ °^ speaking, the writer the possessive pronoun .o.J?sK used for r«r' ^" '^''^ '"''' ^^^ -Ss,';i;::;:.:Sr;;o"!:r*,x'^;ii^,f f "="^^^^ i^*--- *>- form genitives of nos and (v.,. E t /,o • « J ^^ ^ ^ generally regar.led as the tives plural, and are use.l only' n a p ri t I's ^^ iVll "f^ ''^^^ ^^"^^ the genitive sincular of ihn r,on+».. , • ^^"''^' ^hile tiuntn, vcstri are S^;i^lS^Si2 -- ^- s.:!^^.:i;.aL=;^^e^^- 4l^f and^if ,S^^^^^^^^^^ ^^ *^- ^^-d person, .a. , 6e, ana tae po.sessivc suns, a, um, are u. [ as a rule Ego te Unulaui, seil tu non veninti. ■^''os, noa conmles dtmmua. ; B PRONOUNS. 169 e that all in gendoi- E?sent; hut 3 in which lesar waged lis. hip, wliieh >, i»ul in it )t be (H,s- wltcre We srally not 'he termi- emphatic u did not e wanting '«) instead tlie wiiter same way the form (led as the real geni- : ventri are •1 as : quia >n vcstrum ibei's you ; ion, sut, LS a rule tjy „tu", 1ST "'" '» """ ""'J'"* ■" ""« «'«- in which Lnudat se. ' ti ■ Sibi permasum habel u f '"'*"*"' h™9elf. Septem (iraeclae sapmUea civifn ^f ^'"'^ f^'-'^ua'led himself. were at the head of their states. tojrgr'u j;!;"cTb' ,r~r%rth?r "";'• ^^^^^ "^^^ ^^- no* refer a Cacmre inritor, ui sibi simtrLin, ?""' ?'^J'"^* "^ '^ sentence as • invites me) to b^ a litt.-'n/nr ^h ,"" S^ /'/ '''"^"^"^ i'^- U-VlZ^ ejectrunt, Hannibal was driven from ' ^^« ''«''•'«/'■'« aui cives e cirilote eens. There are. however cnseo^ s'kll" "'^ »'y his own fellow-S ' wn er's discretion, as to whether t - r.H V"' '"''''='' '' '« '«ft ^o the used or not, thus : Fadi,, am^Joif^?^'''? P'"''"""" ^J'""''! he ejus) /uunanitatcm, Fudius is lov^l bvC„n^ '^"•■''* f""""'"'^ •'««'« (or humanity. Ca<(y,«a admoiubalaL, , ^" "tcount of bis very meat NoTif «> T„ u ,. J. ""««:) 01 UiuH' greediness. ««bj Jf o'f ^L" sSonS; ctrs?ir.^fr;r, r^rr". -^ -^- ^o the the latter especially when the s ubor.Hn !; i *'"'''* °*^ *''^ ^^^^'^'Ihig clause or sentiments of iL sub ec tof £ S^S/clair' '""^"''rr *''« '''""S expresses (.Ja „«' own sentinien r^ e e s 7.^7 *''^ ?"bordinate clause potcrant, would express the opinion of the na,T;rJorr'''^ ''"' ''"^'^"'^ '"^" jviiJ!i^ =n: ^;;::s!;i^ritX^^'^*^ ^ «-^*^- = ^-- tive, as : ^^ '""°" *" "• t*ie noun is put in the geni- ^^^dla fjmtola fun. v« l^f* * Qutim wea ,cri,.ta neino legal vulao \b nTZ \ ^'''"' '''' ""^ yo«- rtcUare tlmentls. '' ^ ^^^ ""'""" •'^''^'i^ my writings (the ™"f,/^f me) who anrafraid p . *° '^^^^ tliem to tl.. multitude. ea^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Z ZS"^ '' ^^*- -'- ^^^y e- be there might I.o and,i,uity vSo.tt't m ^.''^^^P'-^'^^^'' only where Phatic. xn which oase^the/are purbete"ihtlblnt- v^i T' ''^- Mpu doinus, Domus mea. My own house. My housa. , J? lyb. The ceneral mpimnrr nt ft,„ <.>„.- , nas been explafned in § SG^lid" wf «i;.n\ ™""'*'"*"^^ pronouns special uses of them. ' ^ '^^" ^"'■^ notice only some 170 LATIN GRAMMAR. rM J"* ' , lii'i TV** ■' '.^»* \y;\ -.li u rr-f ' ■ i?^ Hie, hate, hoc, referring to something near the speaker, is some* times equivalent to the English " the present," as : In hac magnijicentta urbis. Qui haec viiuperari volunt. In the present splendour of the city. Those who wish the present state of affairs to be blamed. Ilk, ilia, illud, signifies not only that or yon person or thing spoken of, but also "the well known" or "the famous," as: Ilia aquila. Ilia Medea, That famous eagle. 1' .0 well known Medea. When hie and ille are opposed to each other in a sentence, hie generally means " the latter," and ille "the former," as : Caesar heneficiis atque munifieentia Caesar was thought great for maijnus habebatur, inte'jritate vitae C'ato: ille mansnetudine et misericordia claries /actus, huic severitas dignitatem addiderat. his acts of kindness and muni- fioence, Cato for the purity of his life : the former became re- nowned through his gentleness and clemency, on the latter his sterness had conferred dignity. Sometimes, however, hie refers to what is indeed more distant in the order of words, but is at the same time the Mrst in the speaker's mind ; in this case hie means " the former," as : Melior tutiorque certa pax quam A sure peace is better and safer sperata victoria; haec {pax) in than a hoped-for victory ; the tua, ilia in deorum potestate est. former is in your own power, the latter in that of the gods. Hie and iUe, lastly, are used to point to something; following, but with this difference, that hie points to something connected with that which precedes, wliereas ille points to soaiething new and unconnected with what precedes. Iste, ista, islnd, properly the demonstrative of the second person, often conveys the idea of contempt, especially when in a speech an opponent is pointed to, as : Iste gladiator. That (contemptible) gladiator. § 197. The determinative pronoun is, ea, id, is really the personal pronoun of the third person, and refers to a person or thing known from the context, like the English he, she, it. But it is most commonly used as the antecedent to a relative pronoun, as to- qui, he who ; in this sense, however, it is often omitted, when it is not ^ir.*'- :er, is some* idour of the present state ned. on or thing IS," as : .ea. lentence, hie t great for s and muni- 16 purity of • became re- 8 gentleness lie latter his red dignity. 3 distant in le speaker's sr and safer ictory ; the own power, the gods. lowing, but ;d with that inconnected 5nd person, b speech an ladiator. he personal ing known it is most s tj qui, he a it is not PRONOUNS. 171 ^^o<^ ^"-iute effici debet, id tentatur Vfh-,t n..a\.^ ^ pecunia. "»ctt«?- vvnat ought to be effected bv virtue, that is attempted by ^^ About the agreement of the relative pronoun with its antecedent. ^e^^,^,:^^^ i;^^e is to be set forth with and m negative clauses by ncTueis S vilV>T'' "^^^ ''' '* '' 'i'"'^^"^. has certainly been devised for 'J^"^' ™l'"«onmeiit, and that too for life explicabo eJnque maHmam I shall exXfn"'"''^' ^^ ^'''"'^^"* ' ""«"' rell s:^v^- ^s:- ^' - ^SL^^-ry tf hi:;- ^tS -fee:S;rtLiS!S\^s:r&::;^^:f- *« - ^^^'nculus wei>s, virinnocentlssimus My uncle a mn«f i , tdemque docthsimus i ' * ^°^* harmless and Contutit se ad Sn/rnn^,» r^ ■ tt ^ ™"^'' If^'imed man. -^oc ipso loco. Hac ipm de causa. Exactly in this place. J^or this very reason. toItrS^wCht^Jt^SeTt^J ?rr?'-^r* ^^'•^ ™-* b« t.ken clause, as : "^^'^^ *'' *^^« s^^ject or the object of the Afe ipse laudo. Me ipsum laudo. Calo se ipse inieremit. «S'c ipsum inter/ecit. I praise myself (it is not another person that praises me) pKn). "^"^' ^'^^^ ^««*her Catokmed himself (i.,., he him- seit dux it). ^elsej!^''^ ^^'"^^ ^"°* *°y °°« •.J. ■■#1 V •'1 ,;. '.'« 172 LATIN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XLIII. 4* I ' :M THE VOICES AND MOODS IN GENERAL. § 198. In regard to the use of the voices of a verb, it may be said in general that there is little difference between the Latin and the Jinglish, except that in Latin passive verbs are sometimes used in a reHective sense, as vn-tor, I am turned, and I turn myself ; and that owing to the want of a past participle in the active, recourse must sometimes be had to the passive, where in English the active is used as : CaptamurhemmiUtibus diripiendam Having taken the city, he gave it permmt. up to the soldiers for plunder. § 199. The general character of the moods is— (\.) The indicative states a fact or asks a direct question, as : Pnter fi/ium A Ihenas misit. The father sent his son to Athens. Cur hocfecisti ? Why have you done tliis ? (2.) The subjunctiva does not express a fact, but only actions conceived by the mind as possible, intended, wished for, or con ditional, as : D'icat aliquis. Edo ut vivam, Venias ad ine. SI ad me venias. (3. ) Tlie imperative expresses a command either to be complied with at once, or to be obeyed whenever occasion requires it, as : Suhvenile. mild misero. Help me wretched man. Homiitem in urbe ne sepelito. Thou shalt not bury a man in the city. (4. ) The infinitive can scarcely be called a mood ; it is only tiie name of an action, or a verl)al substantive occurring only in the nominative and accusative, the remaining cases being suDulied l)v the gerund, as : o rr j Amare patrlam honestum est. To love one's country is honourable Aon potidt wiiare. He could not deny it. CupiditaH habmdi. The desire to possess. The infinitive differs from ordinary substantives only by governing its case as a verb. •> j a & Note.— Participles are in form adjectives, but sovem their <»ase" •>« Some one may say. I eat that I may live May you come to me. If you come to me. INDICATIVE MOOD AND ITS TENSES. 173 lonourable. • governing 6?J* C&S8S as CHAPTER XLIV. THE INDICATIVE MOOD AND ITS TENSES. ^..•. (whoever), ^..o.,.o^ VoZ ' J^,^^ 'y^'^' - ^^nis- ever), ?^^a«^u.cMLJ(ho4^r I^Ln ^,^', ^ '"'''^"' ^^«- soever)~e.^. .- ^"owever gieat), utut, utcunque (how- Quidqiild dicis. UtciuKjue .se.,e res habet. ^iuicunque is est. NOTE.- relatives. -Later writers sometimes Whatever you may say However the matter may stand Whoever he may be. use the subjunctive with these e«« eiiam iono/am ci£^ '"'' ^^'* '^^^^ PP* «f a goo.l consul (as It really is) to render help ,,. „ , r% ^"«"try, it is also the SiDeus aut anima ant ignis est Tf P^/i^ ,°^ ^^-^^ .<:\"^ens. ^dem est animus hominis ' u"^- '' f^^'^r ^ir cr fire (assuming this to be true for the sake of argument), the soul of man is the same. chSefo"^^£P^,tjulctte.'"''^'"°''""« '"^ hypothetical sentences, see the §202. The past tenses of the verbs ««o.-./ deheo, convenit, possimi licet an nf +1^7 ^ ' ''"''*'^ '*^' «e^^mm, justu„i coJjnZ. ^ expressions ;.ar, /a^, li«h idiom, ^eT.h^^ltr,C I"' ^''°''^'^"' *^ *'"' -Kng- in these c^ses sSfies tha fs on? ^r ^""'*^?- ^^^^ '"'P^^fe^^^ been done, and th^t it irnnf r i I'''^ ^"^'^* «^ "^'fe''>t have and phipe;fect inttat^ttt T^Jl^^^ *^« P^^-* ^1^5"':'^'» '"' .^'«<'«»«. duci ,-am Yon n^.;,.v^ ■....,. , i^'^Miu oporiebul. C ",-••"». -'"gat long aifo to if^«H";^P"ttodeath^(andit "lay yet be done). 174 ' ill (#1 • ' ♦ I LATIN GRAMMAR. Pairis loco eum colere debehas. ^onge melius /nil interficerefurem. Quanta melius fuerat. You ought to have honoured him like a father (and you may still do so). It would have been much better to kill the thief (but it cannot be done now). How much better would it have Vol^ua dehuit in te officiosior VoJSmnia ought to have been more attentive to you (but it cannot be altered now). \JJ^^' ^^'}J^^ P^®^^"* indicative states not only what is ^f;o viinc Rcriho fpisfolam. Pies iUuce'irit. Bens muiidum gubernat. I am now writing a letter. The day is dawning. God rules the world. The Latin language has no form to distin^ruish between I wnte and I am writing, both being expressed "by .c'^^r^^ (2 ) The present in historical narrative is often used in rt^if iri:;r ^^!r ■""- ^^^ I ui^rtxei. j.ms IS done more or lp.st! in oil languages, and requires no illustration. "^^l^^l^ ,'^:::nfcSrn^^^ '" the sense of event belongs%o the l^t7^:^r^:,Sl^ ^f^^'' *'?°"gh the erat in Italia, while these thine, wp,„ Hi • '/' ''"f'umjam ortum broken out lA Italy liuttfir not «.1^.°" m ns,a war had already long as "or "until." ^^^ "^^^^ ^"'^^^ ''""^ signifies "as as L^nt" o^ni""^''^''.* indicative describes an action either as going on, or as repeated, or as attempted in past time, as • ''"Z.Me^r' ''''''' ''''"^- ^-» ;?- Athens was flourish- Socrate>^ dicebat a "^V '^"^h its literary glory. law which it was attempted to abrogate. Hence donahat, he tried to give, i.e., he offered, folio., .hat ^t xs .ne .eu«e to be employed in ri^scHM^ ^^ ^l INDICATIVE MOOD AND ITS TENSES. I75 upon the writer's Slrnenwhetherf'°° ^ ''"^^"^'^•^ ' b^lt it depe,'ds contmuing to exist, or to mrntiS tiP''^^'l*".«^'^*^*he'^ «« con^^^^^^ he would be justified in usbX perfect 1 Z'^"?' ^'^*=*«' ^^ which case manner of viewing the facts only ^^Sd bfd£e^^^^^^^^ "°" ^'''"»'- ^hl paS'SnlTiL*'^^^^^^^^^^^^^ It-rcf'^^' ^ '?«- --^timcs uses a plal^?n^ime^o?o^'e, at"'" '*'*" *'^* ^^^^^^ - *« take Cras ad te veniam. Bostes urbem aggredientur. To-morrow I shall come to you. ihe enemies will attack the city. Note 1 -tj, t .• • """' ^"^''^ *^« "ty- English, f- weoftente^^e^^prLTwhiVf'^*. "^%?' *•?« f"*-« than the follow nature as our guide «' ^^o^^lr. 'V"*"''^*™^ ^^ "^^ant, as : if we ing of what will happen ^f (nXtTrM '''Tr ''"'■'■''*' ^^^^ writer. peal to gain true fame let him Lcha" e .^ w-^^ »/t"re ! he who wlhes the^'impel^ve'^^wt^nThi'S^o^^^^^^^^^^^ --"'and instead of jure the command will be obeyed as ^^wJ''^!' ^f ^"/^"^^t^ ^'^t he is to me about the affairs of the ^ity' (? am'^uS^'u Im doTo)!"'''^"'*' ""*^ past, like 'the Greek aorist, as f ^'""' '' " ^^^^^ ^^ ^he Romulus condidit urbem Hamibal Rovianos superavii. Romulus built the city. Hannibal overpowered the Ro. mans. Greek perfect. When thereLt '"'"" ^I *^ ^"^'^^^ ^'^d " Romuhxs has built thTdtv^' ^th. .M "' ^- " *^ *^" "^y," or -hich of the two sen es a perfe t to be^T"^^ '''''^- '^ clear from the context, a- : ""^ '' generally Pater Jam venit. m. ^ , ,, , ihe father has already arrived. ' 0t .' '•!»- « ! 176 Scripsi epistolam. Fuimus Troeajuit Ilium, LATIN GRAMMAR. •f \ ' I have written the letter (it is now finished). We Trojans have been, Troy has been (it is now no longer). it^av" b"7r^ir/l^!jP''^^'* '*f ^' ^P^«* ^''t ^itl^ reference to present time remember ; coepi, I begin. Presents, as . odi, I hate ; memtnt, I (2 ) The perfect indicative is generally used after the coil- a«?Me M« pnmum, qimm primum (as soon as), where in English we commonly use the pluperfect, as ; r ^ J /t, tascra movu. the enemy was approaching, he FTi; jr 1 ... , , moved his cami). Lr^' >^ " '■^"^" 'Caesaris When the Helvetii were or had mTSr-^"''''""'''^^'''°*"'^^'"« t'-'^ "^f^'-'n-l of Caesar's ar rival, they sent ambassadors to TT, r ■ • nun. «,tiSSr ~ """""' \^- jr S" •■■', -™,"y r" •beaten, he withdrew from the ^ • enemy, they turned their backs. ^^uil^lu^i: -r-^ Alcibiader^^d fr3 £lX^; -^^^ ^- bafa]Lrti^''^T^''* indicative states an action which had alieady taken place when another commenced, as : Turris jam corrnerat, quum ariea A tower had ilreadv fallpn ad murum admovebatur. when the blterl^g tin 1"^ moved towards the wall. useTfoV"^SVrke%XlLl/'^ «,a, J^^,v.^i„..j 1,." Sre'iter vivkL ess, to descnbe an action wlHnh n-""-- ■- .-..^..«u, „u. wouianave been completed, if circumstanc;s"'had not e letter (it is )een, Troy has 3 longer). ;o present time, I perfects have ite ; meniini, I *ter the con- , simnl ac or , where in nounced that proaching, he M'ere or had C/'aesar's ar- iibassadors to cavalry was ew from the 3rceived the I their l)acks. pecially when ns, as ; iertio after lie had ove conjimc- >rovideJ the IS : postquaiii m domum re- Y tlie batter- lace. Wlien e the i)hiper- 'txir, as soon less, he was on which as : idy fallen, ram was vrall. occasionally ^hich neyor ces had not ^^^!!fA- -- ''•--«. INDICATIVE MOOD .nd ITS TENSES. 177 Ii«.tened thi ^ti 'iS^^^^^l^^^ ^--^S&ES ^^^^''^^n^^^^^^ ^'-t something .iH place, as : "" '"^^"^ "' ^^''^ 'ome other action wifl tike ''^^-^9Uurnvenero,aclte.cril>am. When I „..„ , convena-o. */'"'«''^« «?/""/"" '^^ ''^^ding this 1 shall perhaps have met him ,^ 209. The indicative of anv . questions both with and withm M, r'' ^'-"'"^ "^ direct adverbs, as : ''^'*''°"' "' '^^^^'^'ogative pronouns and Qtiis hoc fecit ? Quid tlbi via ? Uhi hcrifuisti f ^'t valet ? t'hrax est QalUnaSyro part ■Sn '" ^''"18 done this ? VV hat do you want ? How';:heT^-^-t-^%^ -generally indicated bvt^e IX ,S^^^^^^^^ «»• «'^, with this distinction tint J iu f '•'' ""'"' "^'-""^ «ome word of the s.ntenr'alks !"• ?'^ '' appended to '^ny suggestion as to w othe, tt \ ^'^' ^"'''^*^"" ^^"i^^o^t ^vhereas a direct question intLr ?f '" '^ ^'^ ^^^ :*'«« o^' no : tive answer, as • ^ "^trcluced by num expects a nega Audistine mm loquentem f ■^jm ne iJo you dare to deny it •> ""* ' ^o you not see ? j^oes a dog not resemble a wolf ? '•< V) fH i^ It • Ij'' 178 LATIN GRAMMAR. mmm-m, is .«ed in double or alternafva quertions, « : your father more highly? tiSo;;;^s:if^-s.;is,:!:,,!i!^ it is son,e- particles like ne and /n»'/ as ^3/ '^ "'f ^ ''^ '"•^''^ interrogative clo you observe the .silence of tl/ese men A'!! '"''■'' w''/ '''"•"'" si/entium? have you two native countries ? ""m^uirf rf«as habetis patriasf to i„tro.i;ce the7^Tj:;rJr.'S*i"vfhich°f S "^ ^^*:.^"''^*'- ^-«««n i" «« ; but sometimes the first , , art b«iT\^ ^i''^*'"" '^ *"d the .second by all, while the second is almosUnvarkbiVin '"' ""^ 'J'l""'^ "'• "° P^^icle at by ne. ""'''' invariably introduced by an and but rarely (or^'buVinTS^'fi^e'the fiKuerJat''' '^V"*"" '« '"^^^^^-^ by .n cither by ^e.,,"" 'jll^i^^ " "^"''^^^ 'i^'^^^on is " or not," this is expressed Kegarding indirect questions see § 221. i'^ CHAPTER XLV, THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. imiui?; Jplfcf ^d I'^'r?^^ '°"^ *«"«««' *^« present, perfect. A ac L me Sv' '• ^'i ^^" ^"'"^'^ ^'^r f^^-^re for in present W^ nX V Snt t^ tCt^^ °^ t^^^ the present siU>junctiveinvolLt?pTl! Jt^ i '"''' ' ^^"^« it resembles even in form ^^ ^''*"'^' ^^^^^» conjugation. ' ""^^ ^''^ P^^^^^nt subjunctive of the periphrastic aii?'Lte~rfrim%ho^ tens- f ,^ ^^^^^^^.^^ inasmuch as TXtJyZ^r-^^"'''^'''''^^'''^^^^^^^ action takes pW^viti- '" ^""'"^^ ^^^*'^«r ^n -s l..a..e >^itL.xi pu«c or present time, but they do tions, as : 'ur mother or highly ? int, it is some- ■ax est Gallina ! interrogative im. silentium? abetis patrias ? ive question is the second by ■ no particle at nd but rarely oduced by an )od and easily >rum Siciliam at Sicily was s is ex^jressed THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. le present, lor future or wished 'e ; hence ire, whidi . , amaturus )eriphrastio bjunctive sspeciallj itlier an they do 179 ^^^^Z^:^^::^^^~^^i^. the, ao not ^t^ or Whether it i;^r:s^r:j::^r- 4^tJ'i:S:::!2:Z^J. r- -, -^ordinate or n^ nod by the tenses ofZr^^ZJorf r""'"^ '''' ^''''■ rule resj.ecting this sequence of tPnl«=/ ''^"'^ ''^"«^- The IS, that t].e tenses denStir. preL.t fl^T"'""'^''' '"'^^"^""^) perfect) must be succeeded Tv+i /^''''"^"* ^^^ P^««ent belonging or refernn' ' ,> ' subjunctive of tenses denotVpast t(.l Zln^^VT^ T' '''' *->-" pluperfect) must be^ siLeeJed bv J"^*"^^' P^^'feet, and imperfect or pl«perfect-Ty! ^ subjunctive of the Q^'ctero {I aak) quid facias or quid I ask «,), f J^cer,s /"^« i wf/.f ''V ^"" ^'•« doing or Quae,ivi fl have asked) quid facia, T iT ^?" ^'^^^ <^o«e. ^ or qnidfcceris. ' "^"''^-^acias I have asked what you are doine g«a«-./.a,« (I was asking) ) ^^ have done. ^ *'' ^°'°g V«creA7t7 (lasked) {l^^d fnceres or ,n,;,J c..- ge.aeWa,» (I hid asked) ( dfd or Tad [Jne •^^"^*^^' ^^at you nji'y^^ foHol': I'dSi^P;^^^^^^^^^^^ the historical perfect perfect, tie -lepeXultf *' ,S7> > f" " " '"«"« «' f»turo ||i:'frStLfrsftHilr^^ res'Sl7o/!:Li"...?,"l-'i*-« sentences-,... in ^".IZ!!'!!:!!" 'i"" .. is foHowed inlle de;endent'Sel?vt ^"'*'"^ .uences are to be ^^^^^^^i^&^^jt^^^ll^^^^ 180 LATIN GRAMMAR. Mir III ?! I'*"' ■ ' .1 ill' ^^■if' iJ ^^^^^^flr ^ < ^Hf ' '.''? ■^^K^ ^^i^ »rm// for three v. ,riv ' ' .'* T'""' ''* ""'''/'am such a manner thiTt cannot b„ ^If %„*,''•"' ''''' clevastatod Sicily in condition .■ inchmm n ,'m" I, ?/„./, ^/ '" f "/ ^'^'^ *° i*** ''»"«»* dies, ut intericrinl unml hi^ih^X^^ Salamininm i,a mnUos in the senate house for "o mar v -1 w? f{}l ^^^'^ ^'^l')P>V"'^" '^^""'^t'^^ «'"'* "P their dying of hu.Ver is Ts much an > • . "•'''"^/I'f'l «f l'U"«er. (Jferi being locke°l „p ) " ''^ "'"''' "" Imtoncui fact as the fact of their a Sit^f'ir^'incjili^^rS'^^^z"' " ^ p*^^* *^"«^ -^y f«"- ifostv:«m tV«/;«//e7v«/ 1 see verrmant r^o "/"?* '-''f ^'•'•"'"/<«*> ^««C have in.luced Rosciu's ; mSv" Z LTr^/T'" r "",!?''* ^" ^^'^^ '"• "''^y that he should have dismissed; &c ' '' '^''«»«"-^', it is not Ui^ely ^,^^.l^•^^® subjunctive in hypothetical sentences -Au ypotlietical or couditioual sentence consists of tv5o pait protasis, and the cne which contains the conclusion or in te^e or fo m of l! ' > \T "' ""^'^^ ^^ ^^'^^^«" t^^^' the the ;,odSs ^ ^ ^ "' "^ *'^ P^"^^^^^ ^^'---- that of The protas;.<; in introduced by one of the conjunctions n n^^,n^, ein, eUarn., ,uodsi, si non, ..odo, and dunZZl ^ exfreL'ei «>l\;;ot?sis^7^^n"']e?t'tJ 1?^"'^^^ *,^l* *^^ '^'^'^^ ^^-^ - ?..,o.e .,,..• iusi^, at "tluvf^im: yo^SThav^ fe ^Tile'' "^^ = '■'" If you had known it, or some similar 1.11^^ w . H, 1/ n7 °^''«''^'«.«- ^^^m 1^ I^!iin^c^,dar * ' '' ''' ^^^f^^^^^^^^o ^Z wonH partSple'^St^ab&vfat^ ^"™'*™^.^ ^^P^^^^^'^ by a single «^t«r;A no onef if he^e'Se will sav th^t't = T'^ ''"^' mn.nlmualrr, quomodoin hac urbe ..^^1! ho^^^^cTuld fllve in'thiwii ''H^^^''' men are expelled ? "^® '"^ t'l'^ "ity if these Dies dejiciat, si velim nnmerare, The day would not 1.,=. lr^»„ 'rumm'.cmi(kat. 181 What good „,;in would hesitate to le for h,,s country, if (thereby) ho were to benefit it ' ^' If any one had vhile in mind depn^ited with «^vurd, and claimed it whde insane, to give it would boa wroniracfc If.youhadfoun.l.mtthatanasD 18 lyi'ig conccale.l .somewhere yo.i Y.-'-M bo n.tin. wrongry if you did not warn anotlier ma not to ait there. nd 1 a back back ''Podo«i.,ifthe,iHis;;;;^irnS^/^- ^'^" '"''' "^'^PoZnt'S: conclushm al.so does not o.M'/'f '^'^'' '^'^"■^«'-«' ^^^ «l>"closiH, aH ; "^ ^^ "^^'^ in both protasis and «S7 id crederen, errares. Si id credldiHMra, errassps. Plurihu, vnrhU ad te scribei-em si re.8 verba dem/eraret, *"*' *' "Satr'*'"-^^---j^it,e If you had believed this, you wouM have been mistaken.^ It the province could speak, it would use these wor.ls. I should Avrite to you in more words. If the affair r.^uir"! If I had knoM-n you to be there you'° °'^''" *'^^^ ^^'"e to sa7thi..'^ ^^°"^^ -'-t-niy not - s ^^S^r--^ -sr^^^^^ ■^^^ V <^ /i ''^/ c^^ ^> IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) 1.0 I.I |J0 ""i^s IL25 Pi 1.4 IM 2.2 1,6 Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 // 4J. '/• m 4^ f\ iV {< f/u fA ■1>' \ :\ %\^', ^\ WrS k>A ^ yf^ ^ ^ f .V ^ ^ ^ m. 182 LATIN GRAMMAR. icguiar piuperiect. Jiut there are many instances in wliirli ih^ im«<„. feet retains its meaning of a past tense, more especial yirtheprotash^a. cruel cuSt)^,.'!"'- "°"V y"" ^"^^^ regr.nIedOpimiurafan sb anc cruel citizen .' tu, Eruci accusator rssex ridicuh- diss^m iS Pvt+« ' i '^"'"""^'}f,/nm cnmani I Im mc ined to think that it ought to be asked ■ erji havd /;« W "oalnl" « inahn,quameorum omniim fortunas, I am inclined to prefer not alt e this spirit to the fortunes of all of them. The perfect of video which occurs very frequently may in some cases be fTll^'^'"-' l^°*P*i-ivf « = ^/'.'f » rcctlidfliaJvidJiMmZ^Tl^o^ far I am doing this rightly, philosophers may decide. §217. The Eubjunctive as an imperative and optative expresses a wish or a command in a somewhat milder form than the imperative. This is the case very commonly in the third p "-son, as : Vakant cives mei, sint beati, stet Let my fellow-citizens be well, let haec urbspraeclara. them be happy, let this glorious city flourish. * But it also occurs in the first person singula'- und plural for which the imperative has no forms, as : ' Sed reprimam me. hxxt let me repress myself AviII,uh d,em vuleam. ^ Would that I may see that day ht,namsusp,aonemvitarepoliCmes. Would that you had been able to avoid he suspicion. §219. The subjunctive as a concessive mood expresses that something is conceded or granted, and is used both with and without the conjunction ut ; if the concession is ne^Su,.:i;;rS^^Zt^:1^^^ -n- rule, as: able (to do)- or .lisgracefu • '/^'SSJ,,, 2 t"^* ""'"*''"' ^* ''" ^'""O"^- dffemli, tliere was a (wXl'at on abo t Vv' ^ '■"'•"■•"' "";'"'/'■ Plnrart, an set on firo or be defencle'l Avancum, whether it should be tiS.i;;S'^!.SnT?nv:^f"^lf ^^^^^^"'^'^^^ from rela- ^entio, I have said that which I'thiik ''^'* ^ *'""'^' ^'^^ ^'"^^ 9""^ neS™" C^*;;SSf 209" "'""* '^"^«*^"" '^-^ -* -Pect a use?in Jh:Sn^:TSrts1r';n:r' "f"'^ .->»o^o are sometimes manner), and accor.iingirexeS „o fLwnr'''''I'.''''"t ^'" '"^ '^''^^ sentence, as : prope me »tw/o oL^L ,°v " '!' '^ ""'^ .**"'' structure of the Jit eniin. vescio^^Lnnr/n for ir'or^T^^^^ '"'^-'' speaking near me ; tnm^Mnimium quantum, in theTensrof eSmelv ""^f' v ""■''"" ^''""- tum profuit nobismet ipsu., that was ext-fnidTCfSCl:/™ «"""" 'M 186 LATIN GRAMMAR. § 222. The subjunctive is used in all subordinate sentences expressing intention or result. They are introduced by the conjunctions iit, uti (in order that, so that), quo (in order that thereby), ne or ut ne (lest, in order tliat not), ut non (so that not), quin, quominus (that not) — e.g. : Them'istocles servtim niisit ut (or (jtd) nunliaret. Arborihus Italia consita est, ut tota pomarium videatur. Ager aratur, quo meliores foetus possit edere. Nolo esse laudator, ne videar adulator. Verves Siciliam ita vexavit, ut restitui no7i possit. ' Te infrmitas valetudinis tenuit, quominus ad ludos venires. Vix me contineo, quin aggrediar ilium. Themistocles sent a slave to an- nounce. Itiily is covered with trees, go that the whole seems to be an orchard. The fiehl is ploughed, in order that thereby it may produce better fruit. I do not wish to praise, lest I should seem to flatter. Verres has tortured Sicily in such a manner that it cannot recover. The weakness of your healtli prevented your coming to the games. I scarcely restrain myself so as ' not to attack him. Note 1. — The above mentioned conjunctions require the verb to bo in the subjunctive, because they indicate only an intention, and not a fact. The only case where a fact is expressed by the indicative is after ut in the sense of " so that," as erat Alcibiaden ea sac/acitate, ut dccijd vitii posset, Alcibiades was a man of that sagacity that he could not be decuivcil, where the impossibility of his being deceived is as much a fact as that ho possessed great sagacity. Tiie subjunctive in this casp dy expresses granunatical dependence. Note 2. — Ut with the subjunctive expresses either an intention (in order that), or a result (so tliat), or a concession (granting that). Jiespecting the last of these see § 219. The id is often onutted, especially after lied, oportet, vivc.ise est, fac, faxo, and also after volo, nolo, malo, placet, ami cupio, as : livet taceas, you may be silent, although you are silent ; quid vis facia m ? what do you wish that I should do ? fac venias, take caro to come, or mind you come. Ut very often introduces a clause only as an explanation of some general term preceding, such as hoc or illud, as : est hoc commune vitium in mui/nis liberisque ciritatibus, ut invidia gloriae comes sit, a common failing in great and free states is this, that envy is the companion of glory. In a similar manner ut is often used after the expressions, aequiim est, justum est, mos est, and optimum est. Ut, lastly, is used after expressions signifying in general that something is or happens, such as : fit, accidit, contingit, evenit (it happens), futurum est, V.SU venit, f.fquitur, rextat or reliquum est, superrH, proriw^m rst, and the like. In some cases these expressions are followed by an infinitive, as non ne. THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. sentences ced by the (in order >t), ut non slave to an- 1 trees, eu IS to be an I, in order ly produce lise, lest I Br. Sicily in t it cannot our health liiig to the yself so as ;rb to bo in mill not a iive is after ' dccijd 11(111 be (lecuivofl, t as that bo ly exiireasos ion (in order specting tho r aftor licit, , plncrt, and lilont ; (jiiid ake care to cine general m, in )iui(j)i is 1 failing in ;lory. In a est, justum lomethingis futurum cxt, H, .and tb.n tive, aa non 187 mm jonfiwjrrt adire Corinthum, it is not every one's good luck to visit r,o?»7^ ^""Tf «^P''««ses a negative intention, whereas ut non introduces SYl.'"'".^* ""^ consequence, as: hoc tibi nuntiavi, ue irrl-ares Irt porte.l this to you, that you might not be ignorant j but Attirl auTes tantoperc Cacsari fuit grata, ut vktor huic mo/estus «Jn A^ eTac? hP 5n n f.' ''k^ ".'-^ 'l"l?*' ^'"^.^ «° 'Agreeable to Caesar that as con n.eror he d d not trouble him. Sometimes we find nt ne instead of the siini le «/ '"i^ 'iffuXr ^'Tt' '^^ *!!*^"^^? ^""i "^ '*« negative charLter' "'' ihftVh %i^- "'^'* 'l^t*" ^^■"'^ ^'^ ^^'"^""S' '«^hen tho wish is intimated that the thing may not happen, as : vereor ne veniat, I am afiai.l he will l^T '■ T'^lt'TV'"''' "' '•'""'«' '"^'^"^ I ^^^' he wil not come imphTii the wish that he may come. After verbs of forbidding, hinder nfC? venting, and resising (though they are sometimes followed by an inh^nith^ mi?K '"r"'''*^/*^!,'"^'j""'=^^^"'' ^"^^'^ti^e intention is always ex pi essec. by vi non when the negative belongs to a special wonl in the clause, and not to the whole clause, as dedi tibi pecunimn ut iion rinum cmenl biid?"""' ^''' ^°'' *^' """""'^ *^"* y°" '"'Sht purclkse not 4ine but «pS^ 4. -(?!{(•« a compound of qui and non, is used only after negative dZrTa,^ *iLT • '' l"^^'^^ a negative, as : nihil est quod mn {qninfpLu fepraiaru there is nothing that cannot he deteriorated ; vullus est cibus (am !,raris, quin concoquntur, no food fs so heavy that it cannot be doubt th;t"tblTrii ^f •'■"'" ''""' ^^'''^''"" ^"r"'^^ ^"^^'^"^ *'' 'r« w^* J^ aanr^dtr J IJ^ ^^^'\ "^""'l '^°''} Powerful ; vix me continco quin i/lum amediar,! can scarcely refrain from attacking him. Quin is also used &IJ%"^' -""^'l^'"^ prevention, opposition, Amission, and the like because they imply a negative. Dubito (I doubt), when not accompanied by a negative IS generally followed by a question with ««m asSo numresitaseh,us also applits to aptus and idoneus (fit) as • persona apta quae loquatur de seneclute, a character fit to speak about old age ; funs riio dare nomen idoneus, a fountain fit to give its name to a stream. "•-"«. § 231. The relative takes the subiunctive when it is the correlative of is, talis, or tautus, and kindred expressions, as : Non su7nm il, quibus nihil verum We are not the men to whom ess>' videatur. nothinc? seems to be true. JnnomitM est ajjcctio talis animi. Innocence is that condition of quae noceat nemini. mind which hurts no one. In all such cases the relative is equivalent to ut, denoting a result or consequence. § 232. When the relative refers to an indefinite subject, such as is contained in the phrases sunt (there are persons), non desunt (persons are not wanting), reperiuntur (persons are found), nemo est (there is no one), quis or quid est (who or what is there), it generally has its verb in the subiunctive. as : Sunt qui discessum a7iimi a corpore There are those who believe that putent esse mortem. death is the separation of the soul from the body. THE 8UWUNCTIVK AND IT8 TENSES. I93 mere have been persons who be- y«i w ullro morti afferant, /acilius VerZT^' „.„ patienter/erant. """"•"» who ol their own accord, offer to (Iio, than those who bear pain patiently. when sunt qui simply signifies ''ioL "IWl *''t".*''.'^ " ""* the case, and ouHl ,iuo3Juiat, it delights 8o,„e -eTuhit.f'^ " "' "'« indicative as : spoken of, asT ^ ^ ''^''''^'^ *^*^°" °r occurrence is "^"".^Sl^l^'tS."'"'^ '"'^^' ^J -« -"J;^ stand against I'yrrlms, wherever he had Semper hahiti smu fortissbm m.i 'Vh ^ *^'" ^"^*=''• mmman imperii JoUraZ^ ^ Tth^Z.'^^T ^'" ''^'''^'^ as the hravest, who gained pos- J session of the supreme power. " He ,aid, I Jll come - '"'"'' <"™"° "'■'») ''""W >>» tory, or depe„d™?:Ct" tt LVve^tetZ' ^^■*"■''- tive — e.g.: li^eir veius in the subjunc- ^'^".'I'^XZT^lTSZ ^™""'V» that „„ the bank, ./»«« rf,-™, .f;„^,,, ""*"» ?"«« of the river Hviivv- f-^r^--- iittle animals are born which live only for a dav. 194 LATIN GRAMMAR. Socrates dicebat omnes in eo quod Socrates used to say that all men acirent satit ease eloquentee. were sufficiently eloquent on those things which they knew. The following further details must bo observed : — (a.) All imperatives of the oratio recta become subjunc- tives in the oratio obliqua, as : Hedditur responsum nondum tempus An answer was returned, that i< pugnae esse ; caatria ae tenerent. was not yet time for a battle, that they should keep in their camp. When the command is negative, ne must be used, as : Nuntiua ei dome venit helium Athe- nienses et Boeotos indixisse Lace- daemoniis, quare venire ne dubitaret. A messenger came to him from home (saying), that the Athe- nians and Boeotians had de- clared war against the Lacedae- monians, that therefore he should not hesitate to come. (6.) All direct questions of the oratio recta become indirect qiiestions in the oratio obliqua, and are therefore expressed by the subjunctive, as : Ariomslns respondlt, se prius in Ariovistus replied, that he had Galhavi venisse quam pnpufum come into Gaul before the Jiomcmum. Quid sibi vellet ? cur Roman people, (and asked) what Ml suas possessiones veniret ? Caesar wanted ? and why he came into his possessions ? (c.)The apodosis of an hypothetical sentence is expressed in the oratio obliqua by the accusative with the infinitive, as : Ei Urjationi Ariovistus respondit, To this embassy Ariovistus re- siquid ipsi a Caesnre opus esset, plied, that if he had wanted sese ad eum venturum fuisse. anything from Caesar, he would have gone to him. Note 1.— Sometimes a remark is introduced in an oratio obliqua by the reporter of the speech, and such a remark being no part of the speech is of course expressed by the indicative, as : Utteris eum certiorem feci, id agi ut pons, quern in HeUespontofecerat, dissolveretur, I informed him by letter that the plan was to break down the bridge which he had made across the Hellespont. This is the case especially when a relative clause is iiisertca oniy to explain some particular word or expression : Athenis audtre ex Fhaedro meo memini, Oellium, cum veniaaei, Athenaa, philosophos that all men eloquent on h. they knew. ne subjunc- ;rned, that ic for a battle, keep in their ed, as : to him from lat the Athe- ans had de- the Lacedae- ;herefore he e to come. >me indirect •e expressed that he had before the i asked) what and why he sessions ? s expressed 3 infinitive, rioviatus re- had wanted 3ar, he would bliqua by the the speech is iorem feci, id rmed him by he had made elative clause ion : Athenis », philosophoa THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. I95 assembled the philosophJrT^ht1ir?e1n"onetr:ce'" ""^^^ ^ ^'"^'^^ assSo:^; mSlSe veTbfn^l^^^^^^ ^^''^ T ^^^ivalent to negative LacedaemoniosTr>Ssest Mh^^^^^ pronoun, as Themistodes apud situm esse bTbiSarndt^^^^ ""'''f" "^ propagnacuhun oppo- the city of t^ Atiieni mst^a 1 k. S'l'^ ^f °''' ^^'^ Lacedaemonians that which Ihe king's SS .-^a'd'y^suS?;^^^^^^^^^ Stle'e?^''™' "^^^ § 235. The tenses of the subjunctive in the oratio obliqua depend upon he tense of the verb of saying in the SZ Socrates dicit beatos esse. But eos qui boni sint Socrates sayr^ that those who are good are happy. who ipsum ; eoqiie praestnre ceteris, quod ilU quae nesciant scire se putent, ipse se nihil scire sciat. Socrates dixit or dicehat eos qui Socrates said that those bom essent beatos esse. were good were happy Hence, Socrates mhil se scire dicit, nisi id Socrates says that he knows WSll7n ■ Pnmi0 y^fnu^-tr..^^ ..«>„..:.. „„iu' , , . " Knows nothmg except this very fact, and that thereby he is better than the others, because they believe to knoAv what they do not know, but that he knows that he knows nothing. Note l.-Sometimes when the verb of the governing clause is in a na,t tense, the reporter in the oratio obliqv:a, for the sake of l-eater vivtd ness may use the present or perfect subjunctive by transfen^nt himself" fnV.ir''"' •*" ^\^>T -"^ ^^'"^ ''^'^''^^'- *'"rther, if the verb of the govern- ing clause IS an historical present, the dependent clauses in t4 oratk) obliqua may be either present or past tenses. m i e oiatio ^?'^'^ ^TJu "^^^^ '"'''l^^y ^^ observed that the pronouns referring to the ElT'int"-efie'r"S- '"' possessive, are Changed if Te' oratio orinqua. into .eflective pruimuns, and that the person spoken to is referred to by IS or lite. Caesar and Cicero contain nilmerous examples of oratio obhqua which ought to be carefully studied. «i*mpie8 01 oratio •1 I - iU- f;iv 196 LATIN ORAMMAIt. CHAPTER XLVI. THE IMPERATIVE. nnl!?^'.'?^ imperative expresses a command, a i-eqnest, or an eximrtat.on ; it has two tenses, the present and the future Ihe present exp^-esses a command in general, or one that is to be obeyed at once ; wlule the future imperative expresses a command that a tlung shall be done in futureTr when an occasion shall occur, as : Catilina, perfje quo coepisti "nredere ex urbe, profidscere. JustUiam cole ct pietatem. Cras petito, dabitur, nunc abi. Prhia audita paiiclt, quod quum dixero, si placuerit facitote. Catihne, proceed to the place to which you have begun to go, quit the city, start. Honour justice and piety Ask to-morrow, and it will be granted, now go away. First hsten to a few words, and when I have spoken, you shall do It, if you please. The future imperative from its very nature is the form employed in laws, contracts, wills, and the like, as: Ilominom mortuwn in urbe sepelito neve, urito. Nocturna sacrifula ne stmto. Salus populi suprema lex esto. ne Thou shalt neither bury nor burn a dead man in the city. There shall be no nocturnal sacrifices. The safety of the people shall be the highest law. §237. Instead of the imperative, the second and third persons of the subjunctive may be used to e™ an exhortation rather than a command ; the second person :X^\:^eir'''^''''''y^'^^- - indefinite peSt '^r ^r Ti^r^'tik^ ^^SJn^Lr ^^"Tt*'--' Vytria carissima. ^^ so al„rS,?« « J";?^' ^'* "''' "*y' 80 glorious and to me most dear THE IMPERATIVE. 197 request, or thefutiu'e. le that is to expresses a e or when ihe place to egun to go, iety it will be ■ay. words, and a, you shall i the form ry nor burn ■ity. I nocturnal pie shall be and third xpress an id person ; person is )w-citi2ens, it this city, e most dear flourish. ...J, The first person plural, for which the imperative has no form, IS always expressed by the subjunctive, as : Amemuspatriam,pareamus/>enaiui, Let us love our r^nnnfv,, t»* consulamns bonis, praesentea obey the senate ^.V^^f ^ fnutm ner,ngamus, posteritatis care^ofthe .ood' leJ n, d f ' gard present enjoyments, and look to the good repute with posterity. Sometimes, though very rarely, even the first person singular of the subjunctive is used in the sense of an impe,-ative,lsT Sed repr'tmam me. But let me repress myself. ^ § 238 A negative command, whether expressed bv the imperative or by the subjunctive, takes the negative n/ and nou onlv when it is particularly emphatic or refers ouh o one particular word. When there are two or more negative commands, the second is neve, as in hond^m mortumn, d-c, § 236 : nominem Tu ve red" mnlis. Ne diffic'dia optemus. Do not give way to misfortunes. Let us n->t wish for difficult things. 0f2'perf7ct"uS?ctil7aTd 7^ ZTf'^ *'? "--d person or noNtc and the infinitive, aH:nTmeUl,eri^^^ tmnsieris Ibmm, do not cr^ss the rbm.s «^7t. /^„"?l*","'^'' ™f ' \« hoc noL \nejocaA /nLrdo n^t'th Sa 'T ^^'S^Z ThiT- 7 " = quid a/iud cures, do not care for anvthin^ pIop • i^.! f " I ' ^"'^ "^ mand or request, see § 205, note 2! maicative u.sed as a com- *m J- >■'.■, 198 LATIN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XLVIT. THE INFINITIVE. § 239. The infinitive is, properly speaking, not a mood, but a verbal substantive of the neuter gender, simply naniing the action or condition. It has only two cases, the nomina- tive and the accusative, the other cases being su))nlied bv the gerund. But it differs from ordinary substantives inas- much as It governs its case as a verb, and cannot be accom- panied by an attributive adjective, but only by an adverb Ihe infinitive has three tenses, the present or imperfect tense, the j)erfect, and the future. What is called the present or imperfect infinitive is nothing more than the simple name of an action, without any regard to time, as : To read, or the reading of, good books is useful. Legere bonos libros utile est. The perfect infinitive represents an action simply as past, and tJie future as one that is to come, as : Pudet me haec dixUie. tiancremtibiprofuturamexistinio. I am ashamed of having said this. I believe that this thing will be useful to you. r.S'^ '^■-f?^^l sometimes use the perfect infinitive in the sense of a Greek aorist instead of the present, as: mnt r/nos pulverem OlumJcnm dn>.t ; fratrcs tendentes Pehon imposume Olympo, the brothers trvin- to place mount Pehon upon Olympus. j i^ , ^u<= uiowiers iiymg to Note 2.— The present infinitive is ofteu used after mcniun' II remernhpr^ Z}Z ^^\ ^TZ ^'^'^ remembers wishes to intin.ate that he i^aTly witnessed the thing he remembers, as memini Catoneni anLTXauol mortuusest mecum et cum Scipione di.serere, I remember Cato the velr before his death, discussing with me and with SciiiTo ' ^ ^ Note 3. -Instead of the future infinitive, both in the active and in tbp passive, a paraphrase is often used with /ore (i.e., futurlniesle) lulnfl the subjunctive, as: clamabant homines fore ut ipsi seTduimm^^^^^^^ tTemSe","" exclaimed that the immortal goI\remlv:woulf avenge to u^ -^1' ^^"'''if'''' " '^f'^^Oat id nobis, I hope that this may iZpfn «?„^f"K ' paraphrase is almost invariably used after the verb sLro and must be employed if the verb has no supine. ^ ' § 240. The infinitive being used only in the nominative THB IKFIMITIVE. 199 t a mood, Ay naming he nomina- upplied by itives inas- be accom- adverb. imperfect called the than the me, as : ig of, good \y as past, f said this, ng will be sense of a Obimpicum 3 Olympian rs trying to remember), I'crsonally > antcquam 3, the year and in the ut and the •tales ulcis- uld avenge lay happen ' spero, and mmative and accusative is either the subject or the object of another verb, as : Duke eat desipere (subject) mi loco. It is pleasant to play the fool at J , , the right time. Accmatores multns in civiiate esse The existence of many accusers in (subject) utile est. a city is useful tuge quaerere (object). Avoid inquirinc.. Nolo scribere (object). I will not write. The objective infinitive is required after a great many verbs which express an incomplete idea, and must have another verb for its completion. Such verbs are— e.y., volo, nolo, mala, cupxo, conor, jjossurn, audeo, vereor, and many others. The subjective infinitive, on the other hand, is trequently the subject of such impersonal verbs as juvat a pparet, constat, co7ive7ut,decet, expedit, oportet, opus est, fas est, necesse est,/ugit, faUit or praeterit vie; also after such exjjressions as in animo est, ^^ulchrum est, certum est aequum est, decorum est, d'c, as : ' Necesse est venerarideos. It ig necessary to worship the „ . . gods. Omnibtis boms expedit salvam esse The safety of the state is an ad- rcnymbhcam. vantage to all good men. JehUananimoessevaldemejuvat. It gives me great pleasure that you are of a cheerful dis- position. Note 1.— Z?Vc< (it is allowed) is rarely followed by the infinitive • it is generally construed with the dative and an infinitive, as licet Uphoro hoc /amv an Ephor ,s a lowed to do this ; and if there is a noun a^ TpreS L.«'. '''°''?! I'*'' u'^ '1/1*^^^' ^s licuitesseotioso ThemistocH, Themistocles was allowed to be i.lle ; though we also find the accusative in such ca.ses as CH-i lumano licet esse Gaditanum, a Koman citizen may be a native of .'tu;!" ^''f «^?ej™es becomes almost a conjunction in the sense of although," and is then followed by the subjunctive. Note 2.-Po-.ts, in imitation of the Greek, sometimes use the infinitive, where m prose we should expect a gerund or a gerundive, as nequidquam vitabts celerem sequi Ajacem (for in sequendo or ad seqiiendum), in vain wilt thou try to avoid Ajax swift in pursuit. §241. When the infinitive itself has a subject, it is gener ally in the accusative, and of course the predicate also, as -. ,Romanoa adeaae nuntiaiur. It is announced that the Romans are at hand. ^.*. 200 tATIN GRAMMAR Hoc vere dicitur parva esse ista. This is said with trnth that those things are small. caecum It has been reported that Homer was blind. Traditum fuisse. eat Homerum § 242. The nominative with the infinitive is used with the passive of the verbs of saying, thinking, believing. This i.s always the case with videor (I seem), and generally with dicor (I am said) &nd pufoj- (I am thought), and the passive torms fertur, feruntur, traditur, traduntur, and others of a similar -^^ — meaning Oraeci dicuniur vied esse. Non videmur esse vktiiri. Ennius in sepulcro Scipionnm puta- tiir esse constilutus e mailtnore. Regnante Tarquinio in Italiam Pythagoras venisse reperitur. The Greeks are said to have been conquered. We do not seem likely to conquer. Ennius is believed to have bern placed in the form of a marble statue in the tomb of the Scipios. Pythagoras is found to have comti into Italy in the reign of Tar- quinius. N0TE.--The nominative with these verbs is the predicate, for they avr verb esse; so t\\a.t yideor = I am in appearance ; noviinor = I am in name • iomele" ^"^ "' *''' ^"'^^"^'"* ' ^"^'"- = ^ -»"» in the opinion of § 243. The jiassives of the above mentioned and similai verbs are sometimes used impersonally, especially in com- pound tenses, when they are intended to be emphatic When so used tliey are followed by the accusative with th(> infinitive, as : Dicitur eo tempore matrem Pans- It is said that at that time the aniae vixisse mother of Pausanias was alive JSuntiatim est piratarum esse naves It M'as reported that ships of 171 porta. pirates were in the harbour. Memoriae proditum est Latonam There is a tradition that the cod- deam confugme Delum. dess Latona fled to Delos. Note. -In all these cases the whole clause expressed by the accusativ* with the infimtive is virtually the subject of the passive verb. **'°'*^""* § 244. The active of the above passive verbs is followed ' THE INFINITIVE. >h that those that Homer d with the :. This is rally with ihe passive thers of a 3 have been to conquer. have neon i a marble nh of the have come gn of Tar- 'or they arc tions of the m ill name : opinion of d similar in con)- ?mphatic. with tho time the was alive. ships of irbour. t the god' elos. accusative followed * 201 Dicunt Socratem fuisse aapientia- simum omnium Graecorum. Unam essn spem salutis docent. Thucydides Themistodem ait Mag- ve.siae niorbo mortmim esse. Lysander dicebat Lacedaemonem esse honestissimum domicilium ienectutis. Scio plerosque ita scripsisse. by tho accusative with the infinitive when they have a whole clause for their object, as : They say that Socrates was the wisest of all the Greeks. They show that there is one hope of safety. Thucydides says that Themistocles died at Magnesia of an illness. Lysander used to say that Lace- dnemon was the most honour- able place for old men to live in. I know that most men have written so. „„??°^f""~'^^!u?,"^'?^^ language also sometimes employs the obiectiv.. accusative with the infinitive, as "I know hin. to be an honest mn,''9W. cum hom'stum esscMnem; "I wish them to come" 'T^al oT lim to hi English «"^^J^^t'^« accusative with the infinitiv; cannot be inJitatrd § 245. An accusative with the infinitive, like the infinitive^ alone, may b« the subject as well as the object of another VGrDj ftS * ^^lUZtu^n.T"'"' "''"■'' ^'"^J"'*) "/.^ honourable for a soldier to nonestum e.st. die for his country. Majna laus eM mnm hominem It is great praise that one man elahorare (subject) ,n ea scie.tia. exerts him\elf in that science iLZi^r'"" """"'" '^'^''■''■' " '^ '"^^t t'^'^t all men should ^subject). try all things. Every clause expressed by the accusative with the infini- tive therefore, IS either the subject or the object of a verb or ot some equivalent expression. §246. The objective accusative with the infinitive is turther used after the verhs jubeo, veto, paiior, sino, prohibeo, xmpedio, cogo, and zssue/acio, as : EurystheusffercukmleouemNeme. Eurystheus ordered Hercules to aeuvi m erf cere jvssit. kill the Nemean lion. LegatosAthenasmiseruntqui id fieri They sent ambassadors to Athens vetarmt to forbid the doing of thi« Augurea dicCatorem prohibuerunt The Augurs prevented 'the Dic- comu^a perficere. tator from Lding the comUU to the end. «> f I .if. 202 LATIN GRAMMAR. xr,1 m Me impedit pudor hate exqnirere. Shame prevents my searching ,, , into these things, Urbes ad offiaum redire coegit. He compelled the towns to return to their duty. §247. Verbs expressing a wish or willingness, as volo, nolo, malo, cupio, may be construed either with the nomina- tive or the accusative with the infinitive, provided the verb of wishing has the same subject as the infinitive, as : Ctipio Clemens esse, or cupio me I wish to be lenient. clemenlem esse. Sapiens fieri volo or sapientem me I wish to become wise. Jieri volo. Nolo co}md fieri or nolo vie con- I do not wish to be made consul. iitlem fieri. But when the governing verb and the infinitive have diff(!reut subjects, the accusative with the uifinitive must be used, as : Te hiafrui virtute cupirmis. We desire you to reap the benefit of your own virtue. hycurgus corpora juvenum frmari Lycurgus wished tlie bodies of laborevoluit. the youths to be strengthened by labour. § 248. A.n objective accusative with the infinitive is often used after verbs of rejoicing, wondering, and such as express anxiety or discontent, such as gaudeo, loetor, glorior, doleo, angor, soUicitor, indignor, queror, viiror, admiror, aegre, and molestefero ; but it is equally common to find them followed by the conjunction quod either with the indicative or the subjunctive, as : Qaydeote id m.ihi suadere, or quod I am glad that you give me this id mini suades. advice. Nihil me magis soUicitahat quam Nothing vexed me more than vie noil ridc.re tecum, or quam that 1 did not laugh with you. quod nan riderem tecum. Laetor quod Gains incolumis vivit I rejoice that Gaius lives in the 111 tirbf, or Gaium incolumem city unscathed. vivere in urbe. _ Note.— There is generally a slight difference of mfianintr betw"" +he Uifamtive and the use of qnod, the latter setting forth more "distinctly the cause of the feelmg expressed by the leading verb. THE INFINITIVE. 203 § 249. The accusative with the infinitive is sometimes used in exclamations or questions expressing wonder, aston- ishment, or indignation, as : Mene incepto desistere victam ? Am I to give np my undertaking ., , . as conquered? Adeone hommem esse in/elicem That any man should be so un- qvemquam ut ego sum I happy as I am ' ie m tantas aerumnaa incidisse. That you should have fallen into such troubles 1 It IS evident that these accusatives with tlie infinitive are dependent upon some expression understood— e o • "is it possible," or " is it conceivable." §250. The present infinitive is often used in animated narra- tives, or rathordescriptions, instead of the imperfect indicative Ihis inhmtive is called the historical or butter the descrip- tive infinitive ; its subject is always in the nominative. It is sometimes found even after the conjunction qicum—e.g. : Verres ininitari absenti Diodoro, Verres threatened the absent voajeran pa/am, tacrimaa vix Diodorns, shouted publicly, and mterdum ienerc. sometimes scarcely kept from CT J , weeping. Senatus expectabatqmm A ppius jus The senate was waiting, when Zj-2tv ^''""""' *""'" "'■ ^PP^»« pronounced sentence Verrme dicere. about the lent money in a most harsh manner. Note.— The student must be careful in the use of the infinitive after thfl verb .pera (I hope . promitto (I promise) polliceor (I p"om seFS- or minitor (I threaten), which in Latin are regularly followed by the futurl infinitive, while in English we use the presint, as, I promise you to come promitto or polliceor iibi me venturuin esse ' ' ^ "'""'*' '**" *° ^°^^' m CHAPTER XLVIII. THE GERUND AND THE GERUNDIVE. § 251. The gerund, like the infinitive, is a verbal substan- tive : It has four cases, the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative, and governs the same case as its verb. The nomina- tive is supplied by the infinitive j and the accusative is used 204 LATIN GRAMMAR. only when governocl by a preposition ; in all other cases the intinitivo supplies the uccusutive. The following table shows the declension of a verb by example? :— G. D. A. Ah Scribere dlfirifp eat, writing or to write is difficult. Jr.H scribendi, the art of writing. Piifr opemm dnt scribendo, the boy studies writing Pner cnpit scribere, the boy wishes to wjite. Piier paratHH e,st ad scribondum, the boy is readv to write. Puerfalitjutua est scribendo, the boy is tired from writing. Note l.-Sometimes we find an infinitive, where we might expect the gemtive of the gerund, especially after the expressions temtm. enXnilinm capio, and a few others ; but in such cases tempus cut is eciuivalent to " it is iuZl^^:. "'"' ""!f'T '"f''" *" " ^ "-e-solve," as : tanpu, est ahirr, it ff..h Sm «^rT"''^^^?u''''''*'* ^'^'"''(''''''' "'^'^ P"l//^ gemndive. Examples! upon hunting ; so/rcnpcasiiig li the pre- istances in nter opt i me Aristo and n living in ive of the n the con- jenerally has the 3 instead I, must bo )e loved, be propa- of super- ;irpated. jy me, o!" by me. ^"aWa'"""'" """ '*'"^'"'* '''•'^"'Camrhadtodoallthingsatone ir. ■ , ■ , mid the siinio tiiiio. V,x credendum est. u is scarcely to be believed. «f m""^!!" l'"'^* 1^""'^ '" ""^^^ *'^^''« finiWi'uity would arise from tho ,.«« of the da ,ve with a gerundive, that the ubhuive with a or «' i« prefcTabk. ^.^pjz; cit;:r i« tz^^xz:^:. S;r:i;3 ;;^:^s;^;r ^sro^^i^^iadSs '^"""'"" "-'^^- -- § 253. Wiion tlie gerund belonnr.s to a tran.sitive verb, and should accordingly have itb oh.ject in the accu.sative, it is gjMierally changed into the gerundive and takes its o'jject along with It, agreeing with it as an ordinary adjective, as : ComUium xn-his condendae (for The plan of founding a city Consul plncawiiylUs(iovplacando'i:h Facile, incredibile dictu. Jucundum audilu. Nefiis est dktii. Um peracerba gustatu. Mirabile dictu. ERoJ. '.t:.;i '(i '.to say. PleabauL to hear. It is sinful to say. A grape very bitter to taste. Wonderful to say. Note.— Instead of this supine with adjectives, we also find ad with thp V e'w -iterJ ,-rt/'"^'"\«'^ intelU,endu,n, i thing ea.syTo understand In :7c;;:7!:!r:*h;rdrsTy! ""' '''''^^^ °' *^^^ ^'^«"^*^-' - ^^^^^ -« ^,^°^*!.°^*^^ "^.^ the infinitive instead of either of the sunines, as: Prn. ^lit^fL''. ■''^: """T?"''^ (lor -ri^um) moiiCes, Proteus drove his cattle to visit the uigh mountams ; facilis legi (for lectu), easy to be read: 4P* THB PAUTICIPLEa. 207 CHAPTER L. the fourth ive cpfling thviii two XI seel only ittere, and bed io sue for coiriphiin of to demand g to the also be ex- it qui or vt these forms nanner, is credihilU, efas, and ich these II u most tu, adltu, baste. d with the stand. In pudet me 1, as ; Prn- i cattle to THE PARTICIPLES. § 256. Particij)h\s are in form amtta victoria, a sure i, oe is better than a victory that is only hoped for ; admiratufi quacrit vn mm wonaering he asks for the reason; Cacmr iistm .vnunlari vii/itum ndio oppidinnexpuijnavit, Caesai, availing himself of the'extraordi; ;viy /.. 1 of the soldiers, conciuered the town. The participles ratus and f. -tus fre(i- ontly have a present meaning, the present participle of reur and ieo not being used. Note 2. -The following are the only active verbs that have a t si participle with an active meaning, though the form is passive : ' Audeo, I dare. Caeno, I dine. Fido, I trust. G audeo, I rejoice. Juro, I swear. Nubo, T marry. Odi, I hate. Prandco, I breakfast. Soleo, I am wont. ausus, having dared. caenatus, having dined. fisus, having trusted or trusting. gavisus, having rejoiced or rejoicing. juratus, having sworn. nupta, having been or being married to. cms, having hated or hating. pransua, having breakfasted. solitus, having been wont, or being wont § 257. As active verbs gene .-ally have no past participle the deficiency is supplied either by changing the sentence 208 LATIN GRAMMAR. ' (?■? into the passive, or by using a paraphrase with some con- junction, as : (rrhemcnptammmtihmfripiendam Having taken the city he gave it traduU, or qumn urhnn cephset up to the soldiers to be plan- dered. earn dlripiendam tradidit. veS!"™ ^— ^"'"^^^'^^^ «^e difficulty may be evaded by choosing a deponent Note 2.— The present participles of transitive verbs when used aq adjectives, govern the genitive, as amans patriae, a patriotic man ^Tatien. labons, enduring labour. The present as well as past StS^swhpn used as adjectives, also have their degrees of comSn £ ^I„, anmntior, amanUssimus ; doctus, doctior, doctminius. T^^Te Se pai tSe IS rarely used as an attributive adjecti^, and only in such Xaies as S Mume, the future and «««t venturi, the coming years fiTaitici»i^l adjectives may also be used substantively as : Jor^M^^ dead mpn dm;n,ms, a slceinng man. When their neuter is used as a subswfv.' they generally take an adverb as a qualifying attribute is- beTefaru!ml good deed; /accte dicta, witty words; but we also S tLinulimed bv adject:ves, as: praeclarun. factum, a noble deed ; /iT^/a;?;^' gallant §258. The Lntin language, where possible, avoids tne use ot verbal substantives, and often employs participles where lu Jinghsh substantives are used, as : Post iirhem conditam. Ah nrhe cniiditn. Pout and aide Christum natum. Post rer/es expidsos. Cicerone conside. Oiuiie malum nascens facile primitur. op' After the foundation of the city. From the foundation of the city. After, before the birth of Christ. After the expulsion of the kings. In the consulship of Cicero. Every evil is easily crushed in its beginning. _ § 259. A subordinate clause expressing time, cause, manner instrument, or any of the ideas commonly expressed by the ablative, provided its subject is different from that of the leading clause, is expressed by the ablative absolute, that is the conjunction is omitted, the subject is put in the ablative' and the v^erb, changed into a suitable participle, is made to agree with the subject in gender, number, and case, as : Sole atante terra vertitur. While the sun is standing stiU, rr„ . . r. , t'^^ earth turns round. Ha.eresgestaesuntRomxdoregnante. These things were done, when r> 7 , . , . . , Romulus reigned. Jieluctante natura irntua labor eat. Ex«rtinn Ja „a2i«oc „k„_ „o+.-- — -. . .„ — .^„„ Triivu nature IS against it. I some con- ng a deponent THE PARTICIPLES. Muciux Porsennam interficere, pro- posita sibi morte, conatua est. Hoste victo. Classe ilia amissa. 209 Mucius attempted to kill Por- senna, although death stared nim in the face. ^^u ®° *1*® enemy was conquered. When that fleet was lost, or if that fleet should be lost, --^""l2irci%'^T:^^^^^^ *°.-n«ist of a noun place of the participle as the v^Jh 7„! ^ """ adjective often takes the Jiomulo rene\henioml\uTJ.l\-' ^''^ "'^ l''*''^'^* participle, as: vernnt, they 'reTected the affafr Tn tl^fnl'"" «f '.<»,•? ,-i'^-«<"/« rcpUia: cum. Caesa/e imperalrTa^stmi eft Ihl r./f °^ ^"^*«'e« > MlumGalli. thecommand of Caesar; £r»iL,/S^^^^^ ^'•'^ 'f"''«'^ °» ""^''r the summer remained ltZ7Z%rltLtl7iU^^ ^^^ sereno, while sky was bridit • Lf/r,. f^.!^ \ t-? lu *'f ",^ '^^''^ ^"^^ ; coelo innto, Ibeing„^nvilL\"ragSrtr;'';iTi^^^'^ '''' ''^"'^^ "'^^ ^^^^'^ ^ ^"'^ neSeTgSthfchlrus acaurre'. T'^'T "' « P'^^'^^^'P'^ "^1°- - the ««^ubtful, and hich cannot one. cedent, the vn into the e himself in nows. ive3 espcei- I for which BEMARKS ON SOME OP THE PRONOUNS. 211 "^viZ" /T'"'"''' ^r.""""' 3«''i«s Atticus supported the friends of rebus ind^guerunt adjuvit. Antonius^%vith those thLs which they needed. ° The same is the case when the substantive to which the relative refers is a noun m apposition to another, as : Cae,ar Gomphospervenit, quod est Caesar arrived at Gomnhi whirh S;LIX:^"k ''--'^^ i^thefirsttow^slljt ^ "• those coming from Epirus. yo^j^^^rrt^'i^-— ssctr^^ ''' ^"-^"^^ Qua prudentia es, nihil tefvgiet. Nothing will escape you, such is Si mi/ii nejothim permishnes, nui Uvcm \!^aV1u\u^ i • such is my aCFection for you Belfiae proximi svut Germanis qui trans Rheimm incnhutt, qvihus- cum continenter bellum gerunt. Aequum est illos vivos honos nohiles- que rndtdre, quilms fides hahetur, qui rem explorent. The Belgae are nearest to the Germans dwelling on the other side of the Khine, with whom they are constantly at war. It is fair to send those good and noble men, in whom you have confidence, to explore the atfair. ™v,l?^^" \ u^*'" sometimes two relatives stand side bv si.l*. Eim, „o« lata polilm ik arti- Epicoru. vas jot »ufficientlv sion of which gives men the 2^um adolescentem eadiscere mavis, Do ^^ VeTer" a"^ voiir,^ mnn +« SSrr" ^'■""'"" '''''^'^' leLtlltthingSrirnin*g° ' "' *""'• "W'hich in a splendid manner, hi will yet know nothing ? asenfe^fceSth^ho'IlriT'^'' '^^'-^^^^ Possible, likes to connect f.r.!.! • T I 1 • P'^^?«=d'ng oie by a relative ; hence manv a «=en. tence in Latin berrm-q with a roiof;,.„ t^^ _,.; , ' .^^ ,. 'I'v a. sen- . suhsti^te a demonstr^i^.- '^^;;iy ti; ^ ^^ -e In accordance with this tendency we often find sentences beginning ;' ' I 212 LATIN GRAMMAR. Ill It* ' w m 4 with 7H0fZ ,S7, quod nisi, which may be translated by " if therefore " If therefore not," or " unless therefore," and sometimes by " but if " and but unless." Quod, which is in the accusative case, virtually means in reference to what (was said before). In many cases it need not be translated at all, being only, as it were, the cement connecting the sentences — e.g. : ° Tiirnnni colnntur simukitione dun- People pretend to honour tyrants taxat ad tempu,. Quodsi forte at least for a time ; if therefore ceciderunt, turn mlellirjitur, quam (or but if) by chance thev have fuermt mopes amicorum. fallen, then it is seen how few friends they have had. N0TE.-Eespecting the cases in which the relative requires the verb to be m the subjunctive, see § 229 and followiug sections. ^ ' '^ "^"^ ""^""^ ^° § 264. The pronoun idem, eadem, idem (the same) has for its proper correlative qui, quae, quod, but instead of it we often find atque, ac or et, and sometimes ut or cum, as { j. > > Animus erga te idem acfuit. The feeling towards you is the p. . same as it was. i^iqnaeraturulemnesitpertinaciaet If it be asked whether obstinacy perseverantca. ig the same thing as persever- „ , ance. Jiodem mecum patre genitus. Begotten of the same father as T. ,w!lf''^"~^^^°r" * ^^^}^^^ has two predicates, the second is introduced by Ifmqueor etjdem, as : Cicero was an orator, and also a philosopher, Cicero erat orator idemque philosophus. , ^ «-<;/« § 265. The indefinite pronouns aliquis (from alis and quis), some one else, or some one, generally drops the ali after si, nisi, ne, sive, and nuM, as : Si quid in te peccavi ignosce. Si quo erat longius proeundum. If I have done you any wrong, pardon me. If it was necessary to go to any ^ , greater distance. JJanda opera est ne qua amicorum Care must be taken, lest there discidiajiant. should happen any rupture yr -J . , between friends. jyumquui stmde poputus Bomanus Had the Roman people heard or audweral aut viderat ? seen anything like it ? Note.— The same is the case sometimes after ut, ubi, unde, quo, auanto gtmm, quando,^nd. after a relative pronoun, as : uhi semd qvisprjeraverit When any one has once committed perjury. But in all these cases the ali IS retained, if ahquis is to be pronounced with pmphaaio a- S' aHrr'-'-^ aandum eslvoluptati, if any concession is to be made to pleasure. The sunpie indefinite quis occurs very rarely, as aiienum est a sapiente I '. the verb to REMARKS ON SOME OP THE PRONOUNS. 213 Qmd? cum te Praeneste occupa- turum nocturno impelu esse ron fidcres, sensistine, die. What of this ? when you felt sure that you would seize i'raeneste in an attack durin^ the night, did you not per° '^SLrct/acrat.fr "''^ ^"'- What'lf you.to the fact that -'""" *"'" • "Pon your arrival those benches were forsaken ? of whom you think better '»ri»! , '^ ^'' '^ *^'""^ '^"y mortal 7«mc/ do^you Sink tha any anima an"brwfn''"f «^«e c.r^or. me to states than when a'nything it'done by vToynce! " "°^ '' '""'^^ '""^°"^ Note 2.~Quisquam and m//ms are sometimes uspfl in li-r„«+i,„+- i ■I'r, CHAPTER LII. SOME REMARKS ON THE NEGATIVES. hi k 214 LATIN GBAMMAB. ^SeX'l'r"'""' '^" ''°'-' «-""'«'y with .di.c.™ 4rJVoor*i„'t„?pS«ti '-ij^r&er « ^^^' " deny ; „,,,„„, J ,,„„„, m,;,,,,,,"'^^"' ' <'° ""' tnow I .».,,o, I s„,r„i . «.,.^.,„, „„. ,,,„ ^ ;,„„ . ,LSr^:t ;■ i';i,,2s; the other) ; hut it oftenh-vnoeSSf fo .^ F'"°"^''^''"eandnot is followed hy one he'?i„S '^i ^* ^ f "*t"'f ^.1«'"^^ '""/"« negative and the lattei-Xmat^Je in^}Z f' *^'' ^'''"''' ^'«"« '« as equivalent to non, except that ^'^''- J^- " ''^"' '"""^ *''*'''*'^'^ ««. has not, When foKd by Sri^^^rS; Irh^'^T" "'"f^ same meaning as the simple noti. ' ' '' ^^^ ^^^"^y" tl»e (3.) Ne-quidem (not even). The^B twn «,„^^„ Nunqunm Sdphnem offendi minima qnidein re. ne I have never offended Scipioevon m the smallest matter." 4 > .. . . act. j^^t. AssentaUo, yitiorum wljutrix, non Flattery the aunnnrf f • ™w, .,,».„. .., ^ ,„„„ ,„„„„ „v„'„Vw",ffi?.r/:Sid: a£:rmant "" '''"'""^''' ""' >"■ y -ot the greatw .W but not even an evil at all. adjectivea espised. § 222. It W ; VPrjo, I ; nefarius, tfi, and not, oh stronger n emphatic 'ou (lo not t withdiaw lit not," if ne and not vith wcyue !• alone is be treated ver which Iways the >r joined word or iipio evon I in Latin lien both is gener- 'ith you, ne your vices, is I friend, lan. t pain ia ist evil, all. SOME REMARKS OH THE NEGATIVES. 216 Non nescio or non igiioro. Non nego. Non possum non. I know very well. I do not deny or I assert. X cannot help— i.e., I must. Aoanmqmm, .omewhere j «»,«»,. „„„,%vr,^where, &smhil nee tarn inopinatum wertaVn ,™.,/ ^■^""■''^y"^"*''»l'==ed. could happen either so uSeLLrsonnpr//^f T"^""' ^?««'«. notliing or w^-fe/ are used in sSsentenop?,-n«f<:^f '*/'^- «°«»etimes a«<-««1 T®°* = I^«g-itiis or Legio. N. = Nepos. * Non. = Nonae. 0. M. = Optimus Maximu8. • his manu- the frued- irysogonus. ROMAN MONEY. 11. 219 '•aenomina, mother, in ami often > might be ', that is, • addressed f different I only the tie follow- Roman s. iximus. ilusque a. ROMAN MONEY. 1. In the earlif-st times, and till shortly before the outbreak of the rst Punic war, B.C. -204, tho iJomans used .i poun.l {.,7,.,, or /.'.^ 01 copper (ne.,) as their coinn, i coin, and tlicy callnl it ,(« (L't-nitive unit, ami when thousands of asses had to he n.ontione.l. tiie word asmuu was generally omitted, hut the word aeris was added, as centum mdia aeim, a hundred thousaml asses. iJ.l'^^^ value of such a pound of copper was about 18 pence; but m the course of time the weight of the a, was continually .l.niinishe.l, 80 that at the tune ot tho I'unic war its copper value ha.l been mlucedto about 3 pence (as ,ej.tant.rriu.), and afterwanis even to one penny and a halfpenny {a.i nndalis), until towards the end of tiie republic it amounted to about one halfpenny (a.i ^emiuucialis). 3 In the y^^ar B.C. 2G9 silver is said to have been coined for the hrst time in the form of a denariu.^ equal to 1(J and afterwards to 16 asses ; a ,iuiuarius, eciua. to 5 asses ; and a.se.h-r/iu.s (/.,■., ,e.'«,mf.ytiu.,) equal to *2i asses. The last of ^h,,, three coins (indicated by US that IS, «« "^"/-'"'.S or LLS, that is lihra lihra snnis, and finally by the symbol H.S) had the value of about one penny ami a halfpeLv word /m'"'"''' s ''"'""'°" '=""'' g'^nt^rally designated by the simple 4. Sums of money from 1 to 999 were indicated by cardinal numerals, as ^■<(nin tncenti, sexa-nti, o<:th,;/e„ti, &c. : but 1 000 sestertu was expressed hy mitle H.dmhim (for sc^tertiorum), as US !\'-t'' ''■' '.'«:"'<"««''^ c,sf, the lawsuit was estimated at 8,000 sestertii. Ihe genitive .sesterthim (signifying 1,000 sesterces) gradually came to be regarded as a neuter substantive used only in the nluraj and taking the distributive numerals, as: ,e,(ertia odona, S.OUO 5. A million fully expressed would be decifs ceiUenn milia sester. Itum; but It was customary to use only the multiplicative numeral so that a million was expressed briefly by m-.ta-thtni decies, as •symjntpha stdurtu cenUes, a bill for lO.OOO.OUO sesterces. if tl.7«rJ;l JiVJ?'?^ "^ '"f ^ "J^^'? mtertius, sestertla, and scstertium : VY 9n "%'"^'^"*'.the number is simply added to the symbol, as HS XX = 20 sesterces ; if the second, a line is drawn over the ninieial, as HS XX - ^0,000. and if the third, a line is drawn over both the symbol and the number, Ha XX = 2,000,000. Note 2.— In the time of the emperors a gold coin (aureus, sc nvnunia) 220 LATIS ORAMMAH. III. l^' si 'f! 1) > 4 ,*i ft B ROMAN WKIGIITS. ''.w.onewl.o inherits the tlX <^^^ a n Ll f *'"''.°''' ''•«'- -''''''■« «^ one who i„h<.,it.s three fourths So a^,"/^' ^"'^'T- ' ^'"''^ *■* d".^ theUilthof June '*"*^"cc, e.j/., tcHio [unh) Kalemlna Juh,,, ih 4. When a date is mentioned in answer to tho question When' if frol^tehl'Sjbefrre-tteSorO^Sef"^ '''''"■'" ^^«'""-^ acctath^JlL7alT beLe 'In^Vdtr' "*';'• 'V^« «^"'*-° ^ «'« ii:a/cW«rumorSenrf«i: ^ dependent on ante understood, as pridie on the 6th day before the Kalends of March hII/ +t^r ' Itself was called Ms sextus, the mind S be^ng both Ss IZ ^ot;t! "'"'"'' ^"^'^^^ d-tinguished by the atfributesTr^^:. Tnd yerr'''from°3K''-? ''.^1'^^''^^^^^ complete Calendar of an ordinary 222 LATIN GRAMMAR. Ir»i' " I .1 ^^n|i -1 ^^^B^d ! . IRf^^ ^^Vrl' ^^Hl ' H.i! ^^^H^ & ^|; B t.t [h)^ ^Mil ^^nii February has 28 days, in Leap Year 29. 1 i c 2 -sa JO April, June, September, November, have 30 days. nte Nonas. Nonas. -ante Idus. dus. Ante Kalendas - (of the nioiith follottiug). Kalendas (of the nth following). ^ & January, August, Decern !,er, have 31 days. DlS. ante Nonas. Nonas. >- ante Idus. dus. Ante Kalendas (of the ^ month following). alendas (of the month following). March, May, July, Octcber, have 31 days. 11 1 § n IS "st 1 ^ 2 w| I'i a 5 i 1 § |3 1=1 . •c 3 -.; 1. .. " >-< N so ■* in ^oi^oirtj^" _•.»,• -i! _5:. -•.-•.•--•_. . . . . , , . . XI "I ■S2 s o .-3 c o s c o s «> Jlbam i^Tilkr ^ dTo/is (Ebuatloital Siricjs. -»-♦-« •►->-4- NEW PUBLICATIONS (Authorized by the Minister cl Education). MASON'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR-With Ap- pendixby W. Houston, M.A 24th Ed. $0 75 FLEMING'S ANALYSIS -With Examination Papers byW. Houston, M.A. Second Canadian Edition J QQ HAMBLIN SMITH'S ARITHMETIO- By Thomas Kirkland, M. A., and W. Scott, B. A . 75 HAMBLIN SMITH'S ALGEBRA- With Ap- pendix by Alfred Baker, B. A., Mathematical Tutor, University College, Toronto 3rd Ed HAMBLIN SMITHS GEOMETRY - School Edition, with Examination Papers from tho Toronto and Magill Universities, and Normal School, Toronto q HAMBLIN SMITH'S GEOMETRY-Books i and 2, with Explanation Papers— Cloth... 30 HAMBLIN SMITH'S GEOMETRY-Books 2 and 3, with Examination Papers— Cloth "0 HAMBLIN SMITH'S STATICS- With Append dix by Thomas Kirkland, M.A... o 90 HAMBLIN SMITE'S HYDROSTATICs". ".'!!*. 75 ELEMENTARY STATICS-By Thomas Kirk- land, M. A., Science Master, Normal School, '^<>^o^^o 3j.ji Ej' J QQ POTT'S ELEMENTS OF EUCLID o 75 POTT'S EUCLID-Books 1 and 2 " 30 2 and 3 -...""".".'.*' 30 LEWIS' HOW TO READ o 75 BEATTY& CLARE'S BOOK-KEEPING.'."'*"' 70 HEALTH IN THE HOUSE -By Catharine ^^^^^^ - ..3rd Ed. CO 90 90 n m ml M sin ii 11 « H Hi 3 03 o H i •H »4 to MILLER'S NEW SWINTON'S LANGUAGE LESSONS. Adapted to Canadian Schools, By J. A. MACMILLAN, B.A., Ottawa, COLLEGIATE INSTITUTE. UKAMMAB, the authorized text book for Public Schools T),n Definitions, Classification of Pronouns V,^nZ nlTn PRICE 25 GENTS. FROM SOUTH HASTINGS' BOARD OF EXAMINERS e«pe^lafly alTted^^o tte''w'an'tforP^« ^''T''" ^ Macmillan. is similatiou of tho rules anrdeflnfti^^^^^^^ '"^''^''- ^He as- text book, Mason's Grammar ««Hon^' i^a^? °* ^^^ advanced makes it inch prcferab^ to anv nf tv,l ''/{^'''^ improvement and Edition of Language Lessons Lin^f^°V.'^*''*'H''^^«- WUlithis teacher may safilyre entrusted^ fh ^" ^,v° "^"^^ inexpe .need WM.WlLKIN80N,M.A.,H»dM,,te Model .naO,nl,.l school ery praise for makinB hia rt«fin,-f/i!.tl°l°- 1}]^^.'^'^°^ i3 OQ aeser%riveTpV3TsVf;7Si^JS«1 1•^^^ of Masons' GriSr. thug prevontfn^ f^"S*'°"^ i^^'^'^^ ^'^^ "lose fusion, that alwavBreRnltf3Mmi„„„-^*^''^°^^°^ *'™e und con- He has accomSe J thisl^ hou^^^^^^^ *^° ^^'^ °' definition., more difflcult.Tin any wZSroSu"^ the work a whit I observe that the mXiMsL arrSd^w P«?ul'ttr character, usod n the same class as vnnrotWo i-^- '^* *^'^ edition can be venienco. I ^Wsl forit as muH,^n.^i'*'°"^*^*^''"* any i^icon- had, which since Is ,oarfroui1^o?reZ„H,L*' Pfe^f lessors have book is. perhaps, thi highest pSl'^angi^^^^^^^ °' *^« C CLARKSON, B.A., Head Master. Model School, BrockviUe I bave examined carefr.llv vour "Mflw a •> ^r«'CKvuie. Lessons," by MacmiHan. The book is excel]e,r/°r?° " ^'^^Bvage improvement to bring it into enth^ hn,.^^^ "*•- J*,^*« "• decided only difficulty I expedience is to ^V'epTtooto? ,'^^« for wiuoh no text book is authoriznri p,P,?i *^^e '^^ t"rd class, vately as on aid to follow the o^Iltsaohigf ^^ ^°°^ *"*• 0N8. V^A. MASON'S ols. Tlio GrENEHAL ny with RS. aillan, is The as- dvanced eiit and Vith this e ' 3nced lomposi- ellevjllo. rrenton, atiugs. ; School 3millan le editor .h those nd con- iiitions. a whit iracter. can be ' i>)Con- rs have of the viUo. nguage lecided 8. The I class, okpri-